Go Back   Movie Fan Central Discussion Forums > Movie Talk! > Horror Movie talk
MOVIE FAN CENTRAL FAQ Members List Calendar Search Today's Posts Mark Forums Read

Reply
 
Thread Tools Display Modes
  #1  
Old 06-27-2012, 04:36 PM
Helloween - a spin-off of Halloween and Hellraiser

How long ago does it feel when "Freddy vs. Jason" was released in theaters? I will no longer say, like it was yesterday. Maybe a week or two ago nowadays. FvJ did what it set out to do and was incredibly successful. It also inspired two rumors that never came true. One was "Freddy vs. Jason vs. Ash." Ash, as in Bruce Campbell's character from the "Evil Dead" series.

The other rumor was "Helloween." We will never know how the intented "Helloween" of the early 2000's would have turned out. But, "Helloween" does unofficially exist now. After writing three fan-fiction sequels to the "Halloween" series from 2008 to 2009, I turned to the "Helloween" rumor and was able to make sense of its unlikely concept. It is a plausible idea. I wrote it from November 2009 to January 2010, and I don't want to sit on it any longer. It should be shared with the fans. It is 195 pages long, the length of a young adult novel. In my mind, it plays out like a two-hour movie. And it's written, "directed," and "composed" like a movie. I try to bring the theatrical experience we will otherwise never get to see from the studio.

My "Helloween" definitely would not have been made in the early 2000's. It follows the discarded "Halloween 6" storyline. H6 was already a radically different sequel to H1-2-4-5, and "Helloween" takes it to another level. Think "Hellbound: Hellraiser II" and "Halloween 666: The Producer's Cut," and that gives a good impression of my take of it. It ultimately follows the "Halloween 6" storyline and the first three "Hellraiser" films. It features the Druid cult from "Halloween 6" and follows after the events of "Hellraiser III." However, it returns to the seriousness of the first two "Hellraiser" films.

Like the "Halloween" series, I intended to make it suspenseful and scary. And like the "Hellraiser" series, I intended to make it dark, disturbing, particularly violent, and possibly uncomfortable in parts. This is part-Hellraiser after all. I wound up going out of my comfort zone to write this thing. However, there is also a strong attempt at character development and depth. When I write something, characters come first before the intended violence. For anyone who bothers reading this, I think you'll be pleasantly surprised.

So, "Helloween." Kara Strode, Danny Strode, Stephen Lloyd and Tommy Doyle having another misadventure with Dr. Wynn and the Druid cult. The world of "Hellraiser" and the first sequel's vision of Hell playing a part in it. Pinhead and the three original Cenobites who stood by his side having their moments to shine. Michael Myers lurking around any corner of Hell. And also, a little fight between Michael and Pinhead. It is not the focal point of the story, but it is short and sweet.

"Helloween" begins by recapping the endings of "Hellraiser III: Hell on Earth" and "Halloween 666: The Producer's Cut." I left out some of the silly elements of "Hellraiser III"'s finale and cut to the point, as to not waste too much screen time. And then, there's the baffling ending to H6. As you will see, I pick up where the movie ends and my first order of business is to close the door on Dr. Loomis' legacy. It's for the better. RIP, Loomis. Now, on with the show.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-30-2012 at 05:09 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #2  
Old 06-27-2012, 04:48 PM
Helloween - Part 1

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to a dark screen. Before the movie begins, a message appears: The following film is intended as a sequel to “Halloween” (1978), “Halloween II” (1981), “Hellraiser” (1987), “Halloween 4: The Return of Michael Myers (1988), “Hellbound: Hellraiser II” (1988), “Halloween 5: The Revenge of Michael Myers (1989), “Hellraiser III: Hell on Earth” (1992) and “Halloween 666: The Producer’s Cut” (1995).

-Cut to the dark screen. At first, the dreary undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme begin picking up. And then, the screen fades in to reveal the point of view of a camera panning into a cabin setting. Inside the cabin is Pinhead, the Prince of Hell, and Joey Summerskill, a reporter who uncovered his dark world. As the scene reveals, Joey is on her knees and Pinhead is about to swing a hook with a curved blade at her. That’s when a voice of reason speaks up.

Elliot Spencer: “Couldn’t resist playing games, could you?”

-Pinhead turns around and sees the soul of his former self stepping out of a dark corner. Before Elliot got his hands on the puzzle box and ultimately became his own twisted alter-ego, he was a British Army Officer in World War I. After Pinhead and his former soul became separated in recent events, his alter-ego was free to reign with no moral compass. He escaped from the boundaries of Hell and tried to create Hell on earth. But Joey has helped prevent that.

Elliot Spencer: “You had to come through the window of her mind. Now, you’re in my dominion…”

-Elliot steps up to Pinhead.

Elliot Spencer: “…And now…we’re going to Hell.”

-Elliot reaches for Pinhead’s left hand. He grasps it (Clench!) and forces Pinhead to drop the puzzle box. The box falls to the wooden floor (Cha-ching!) and Pinhead swings his right hand to attack Elliot (Swish!). Elliot catches Pinhead’s right arm (Clench!) and both of them start struggling to dominate over the other. As they continue struggling, their foreheads begin expanding. Their foreheads and faces expand, stretch out, and start molding together.

-Joey witnesses as Elliot and Pinhead gruesomely become one once again. Elliot eventually loses the battle, and his body is sucked into Pinhead. As Pinhead takes in Elliot’s soul, he struggles to win over the goodness Elliot has left to fight back with. He fully takes back the soul of his former identity and prevails. He then turns to Joey.

Pinhead: “Now, where were we?”

-Suddenly, Pinhead starts struggling again to hold back Elliot’s soul. He struggles and his face morphs back into Elliot’s.

Elliot Spencer: “Joey, send me to Hell!”

-Pinhead’s face morphs back and Joey looks over toward the puzzle box on the floor. She reaches over and grabs it. She tries to open it correctly and send Pinhead back to Hell. As she does, Pinhead begins approaching her with the hook. Joey continues trying to open the box, and one end of it finally opens up. It opens (Ching!) and and a blade swings out (Shing!). Joey turns the the sides around (Ching!), and a blade swings out of the other end (Shing!).
As Pinhead closely approaches Joey, he tightly grasps the dagger (Clench!). Joey finishes closing the sides of the puzzle box (Ching!). And as Pinhead steps up to her, she stabs the box into Pinhead’s chest (Shing!) and prevails.

Joey Summerskill: “Go to Hell!”

Pinhead: “Aaahh!”

-Pinhead stumbles back and Joey crawls away for safety. Electrical charges spark from the puzzle box (Cchhkktt! Cchhkktt!) and Pinhead begins losing control of his power outside of Hell. Joey witnesses as Pinhead loses the battle. His body morphs out of shape and it is sucked into the box. The box morphs back into a square and it spins around in mid-air. It then falls into the law of gravity and into the laws of earth.

-Cut to the puzzle box as it rests on the gravel ground of a construction site. As the camera pans up from the box, both it and Joey are revealed to be back on earth and in reality. Finally, the battle between Pinhead’s good and evil is over. His evil won, but so did the good. Pinhead is back in Hell where he belongs, and he will never seek to create Hell on earth ever again. The screen slowly fades to black.

-Cut to the dark screen. It fades in to reveal a back alley of a building. It is late evening. As the camera begins panning in on the alley, the date “1995” appears. The words “Halloween Night” appear after. As the camera pans in closer, revealed to be waiting in that alley are Dr. Sam Loomis, Kara Strode, Danny Strode, as well as an infant child in Kara’s arms. That child is Stephen, the last thing Jamie Lloyd was able give to the world.

-Posted on the wall is a sign reading: Smith’s Grove Warren County Sanitarium Employee Entrance. The entrance door opens and Tommy Doyle steps out. He lets go of the door and tosses aside the Druid robe he wore in order to infiltrate the Druid Cult and rescue the others. Loomis turns to him.

Dr. Loomis: “Tommy, where is he?”

-As the entrance door swings back shut, Tommy turns to Loomis and prevails.

Tommy Doyle: “It worked. The power of the Runes stopped him.”

-Inside the sanitarium and in one of the hallways is Michael, standing stone cold and motionless. Rolled out in the form of a circle, and physically incapacitating Michael, are marbles symbolizing the various Druid Runes. Dr. Terence Wynn, none other than the Man in Black and leader of the Druid cult, steps into view and approaches Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael…what have they done to you?”

-Wynn stops in front of the line of border of marbles and looks down at it oddly. He steps over it and walks up to Michael’s side. As he does, Michael’s left hand balls into a fist (Clench!). Perhaps he is finally tired of Wynn’s control.

-Back outside in the alley, the others are ready to leave and get the heck out of there. All except for Loomis. Kara, in the front passenger seat of a Jeep, turns to Loomis questionably.

Kara Strode: “Where do we go now?”

-Loomis, outside of the of Jeep, speaks up.

Dr. Loomis: “As far away from Haddonfield as possible.”

Tommy Doyle: “Come with us.”

Dr. Loomis: “No, I, I, have a little business to attend to here.”

-They look on at Loomis, and then Tommy starts pulling the Jeep away. The camera pans in on Loomis as he watches them drive away and hopefully to safety.

-Back inside the sanitarium, elevator doors open and Loomis steps out into a lobby. Without the use of his cane, he slowly makes his way toward the open caged entrance leading into the hallway. He then stops and grasps a bar on the cage door.

Dr. Loomis: “Michael…”

-He slowly makes his way into the hallway, where Michael is revealed to be laying unconscious. He slowly steps around to Michael.

Dr. Loomis: “Michael…It’s all over…It’s all over…”

-He steps right up to Michael and stops.

Dr. Loomis: “…It’s all over now…”

-He then reaches for the white Halloween mask and pulls it off. And underneath the disguise is not Michael’s unseen face, but the face of Wynn. As it turns out, Michael turned the tables on Wynn and changed disguises. Loomis can’t believe his eyes. Wynn then comes to. His eyes open, he picks his head up, and he looks around. Wynn, just as surprised, looks up at Loomis.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael…Michael’s gone!”

-He then reaches for Loomis’ right arm (Clench!). Loomis tries to get Wynn off of him, and Wynn prevails.

Dr. Wynn: “It’s your game now, Dr. Loomis!”

-He then lets go of Loomis’ arm. Loomis rolls down the sleeve of his overcoat and grasps his wrist. And what he sees is the Thorn mark appearing on it. He looks around for a moment, slowly realizing what Wynn has in store for him. And upon feeling the power of Thorn within him, he shrieks.

Dr. Loomis: “Aaaahhh! Aaahh! Aaahh!...”

-In another, and very dark, hallway is Michael dressed in Wynn’s black outfit and making his escape. Upon hearing Loomis’ screams, he stops in his tracks. The silhouette of his dark figure, and unseen face, turn to the side.

Dr. Loomis: “…Aaahh! Aaahh! Aaahh…”

-The camera pans down from his right hand to his shoes. He then continues stepping forward, still not free of the evil but free of Wynn’s control.

-Back in the other hallway, Loomis begins settling down.

Dr. Loomis: “…Aah…”

-He just looks on at the horrible marking on his wrist, like a deer caught in the headlights of a car. And as he does, Wynn begins getting up.

Dr. Wynn: “Well now, my friend, this is where we say goodbye. And this is where I get off…”

-As Wynn picks himself back up, Loomis continues looking aimlessly at his wrist.

Dr. Wynn: “…If there’s anyone more qualified to watch over Michael from now on, it’s you. I had been watching him for over thirty years. Long before he would first strike, I knew he was the one. And now, since you have succeeded in altering everything that was supposed to happen tonight, it is your turn to take over as his guardian.”

-Loomis wearily turns to Wynn.

Dr. Loomis: “Guardian…?”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes. Even if you and your friend hadn’t interrupted our ceremony, I was still planning on turning all of this over to you. And now, it’s yours. If you think it’s all over, you’re mistaken. He is still out there and the evil within him is still out there. Don’t worry about looking for him. You’ll know where to find him. We both do. In due time, you’ll know what to do and you’ll feel more comfortable running Smith’s Grove. And also watching out for Michael. It’s now time for you to watch out for him, and it’s time for me to retire. Good bye…old friend.”

-Wynn turns to walk away. Loomis watches as he does. And then, he speaks up.

Dr. Loomis: “You wait…”

-Wynn turns back to Loomis questionably. Loomis looks on at Wynn, then to the scars on his hands and wrists. And also at the Thorn mark. He turns back to Wynn and speaks up with every ounce of life he has left in him.

Dr. Loomis: “You think I cheated death in Haddonfield years ago to see him walk out of the flames? All so that he can continue walking in those same flames for more Halloweens to come?…”

-Wynn looks on as Loomis grasps his own right arm.

Dr. Loomis: “…You think I earned these scars and burns, so that I could take over the very institution to let him go and continue in your vanity?...”

-Loomis grasps his right wrist and steps up to Wynn.

Dr. Loomis: “…You think this can corrupt me like it corrupted you a long time ago? After everything I’ve seen, all the evil I’ve witnessed in Michael’s eyes, and discovering what you truly are tonight, nothing will make me become a part of this…lunacy. You, you belong here. Not free in these hallways, but caged up with all the others. Michael is not the monster. You are. You corrupted him and are responsible for all the madness. I refuse to be a part of it.”

-Wynn looks on at Loomis for a moment, and then speaks up.

Dr. Wynn: “You think it’s that easy to walk away? It isn’t. You’re a part of it now. Walk away, and it will follow you. And it will make you a part of all this. Just you see. Just you see, old friend.”

Dr. Loomis: “We are not…”

-Loomis suddenly hesitates and grasps his chest.

Dr. Loomis: “…Argh…Argh…”

Dr. Wynn: “Loomis, what is it?”

-Loomis, grasping his chest like never before, helplessly looks on at Wynn and then drops to his knees (Thud!).

Dr. Loomis: “…Argh…”

-Wynn turns to Loomis urgently.

Dr. Wynn: “What’s wrong with you?”

Dr. Loomis: “…Argh…Argh…”

Dr. Wynn: “Is it your heart? Is it another stroke? What can I do? Tell me!”

-Loomis, helplessly looking up at Wynn, reaches up to him. Wynn gets down to his knees and takes hold of Loomis’ right arm. Yet, he finds himself unable to do anything as Loomis is at a loss for words.

Dr. Loomis: “…Argh…Argh…”

-As Loomis struggles with every breath, Wynn can see it in his eyes. He is dying. He sighs.

Dr. Wynn: “Loomis…”

-Loomis struggles with his last breath.

Dr. Loomis: “…Argh…”

-Wynn can see the last ounce of life within him fading away. His right arm goes limp and his body falls over. Still grasping Loomis’ right arm, he looks down at the Thorn mark on the wrist. And he sees it beginning to disappear. Wynn shrugs.

Dr. Wynn: “No…No…”

-Wynn witnesses as the Thorn mark vanishes off of Loomis’ wrist. And he finds himself alone. He thought Loomis would be strong enough to take over as guardian of Michael and the cult. He also thought taking on this duty would make him stronger again. But he was mistaken. Loomis was too old, too ill and too weak. And as is, it is still up to him to watch over Michael and the cult. Wynn can’t believe it.

Dr. Wynn: “No…No…No, dammit…”

-He then looks down at Loomis’s body and sighs.

Dr. Wynn: “Good bye…old friend…”

-Wynn sighs and gets back up. He turns away from Loomis and steps back. He looks around in front of him and he sighs. The camera begins panning away from Wynn, with his back turned to the audience, as he prevails.

Dr. Wynn: “The game is still on. Michael is out there and he needs me…”

-The camera pans away from Wynn and past Loomis’ body.

Dr. Wynn: “…The time will come for another Halloween…”

-The camera pans away from Loomis and down the hallway.

Dr. Wynn: “…And when that time comes once again, we’ll be ready.”

-The camera pans further away down the hallway, and then up into the ceiling. And into darkness. Within that darkness, opening credits begin appearing. And at the same time, the eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up, but with darker undertones. Darker undertones that fit right in with the world of “Hellraiser.” The title “Helloween” appears and the darker theme plays on. As it does, the screen fades in to reveal the camera panning down a dimly lit hallway with architectural posts every several feet on both sides.

-The opening credits continue to roll and the dark “Halloween” theme continues to play. Eventually, the opening sequence plays out and so does the dark musical theme. As the final opening credits roll, the camera reaches the end of the hallway and pans into darkness.

-Cut to the dark screen. It fades in to reveal a close-up of the puzzle box, or rather Pandora’s Box, sitting on a table. The camera pans away to reveal the box being offered to an unseen tourist by a male street peddler in an undisclosed third-world country.

Street Peddler: “What is your pleasure, doctor?”

-The dark undertones of a familiar voice are heard.

Dr. Wynn: “The box.”

-Wynn remains off-camera. Only his hands are seen as he sets a very large set of bills onto the table and pushes them over toward the street peddler.

Street Peddler: “Take it, it’s yours.”

-Wynn’s right hand takes hold of the puzzle box and disappears off-screen. The camera then pans around to reveal Wynn’s silver-tipped boots in the corner of the screen as they carry him and the box away from the street peddler. The street peddler goes on once more.

Street Peddler: “It always was.”

-Cut to the front of a four-story, scholarly-looking building. It is evening. A sign in front of it reads: Smith’s Grove Warren County Sanitarium. Yet, the next image is that of a familiar back alley. Clearly, this is not the legitimate facility it pretends to be. Regardless, the date “October 27, 2000” appears.

-Cut to inside the building. Cut to the lobby. Cut to the hallway. And cut to an underground basement lair where a ceremony is taking place. Gathered in a group are Druid members dressed in robes. Lit around them are candles. And leading the ceremony is Wynn, standing behind an alter. The camera slowly pans towards him as he goes on.

Dr. Wynn: “Samhain is now upon us and showing itself in the stars is Thorn. Thorn could not be more furious with us. By working with Thorn five years ago, we interfered with its destiny. Loomis, as well as outside forces, interfered as well. Thorn wished to work alone, and it finally lost its patience with us. Most importantly, with me. Not only that, I made a serious miscalculation. I challenged Thorn and all the associated Runes by electing Loomis to become the new leader of the cult. I couldn’t have been more mistaken.”

-Wynn looks on at all the members for a moment, then continues.

Dr. Wynn: “Since nearly exposing ourselves to the outside world five years ago, it is time for my journey to finally end. Perhaps long overdue. And perhaps for the better, and for a fresher direction.”

-Once again, Wynn looks on at all the members for a moment. He then looks back to a new member in the darkness behind him. He steps aside and allows the new member to step up to the alter. The new member, wearing a black robe and hood, steps up to it. His/her hood turns to Wynn, then over to the other members. She then takes off the hood and is revealed to be a young woman in her thirties.

Dr. Wynn: “Tonight, I am passing on my reigns to a new leader. My own daughter, Melinda, who I foolishly passed over in favor of Loomis. She not only is the new cult leader, but also the new Chief Administrator of Smith’s Grove. Future congregations will continue to be held here.”

-Wynn turns to Melinda.

Dr. Wynn: “This will only begin to make up for overlooking you.”

Melinda Wynn: “I understand. I forgive you.”

-Wynn turns back to other members.

Dr. Wynn: “As matter of fact, our latest plans to keep Thorn and our existence in check are all her ideas and not mine. I believe she has the makings of a great leader…”

-Wynn turns to Melinda, then back to the other members.

Dr. Wynn: “…In the years to come, I doubt I will be known as strong a leader as those from the past. I can only hope to be remembered for my dedication.”

-Wynn steps aside and allows his daughter to take over. Melinda turns to her father, then over to all the Druid members.

Melinda Wynn: “Indeed, Samhain is now upon us and Thorn is showing itself in the stars. We’ve waited a long time for Thorn show itself again. Over the course of the last five years, I couldn’t have been more anxious to take over where my father left off and allow Thorn to live up to its destiny…”

-As Melinda goes on, the camera focuses on her father in the background. He’s recently travelled across the world to get his hands on the puzzle box. What is he not telling? What does he have in store for Thorn? How does he intend to help Thorn finish what it started? The camera focuses back on Melinda.

Melinda Wynn: “…I already have a plan in motion to insure that Thorn will finally end its journey this Samhain, and be free to rest before starting over with a new generation. While Thorn remains adamant with my direction so far, and has every right to, I look forward to helping it on its journey and allowing it to rest after so many exhausting years…”

-Melinda turns to her father, then back to the Druid members.

Melinda Wynn: “…In four days, I set out to accomplish what father tried and failed to do.”

-The camera focuses on Melinda for a moment, then slowly fades to black.

-Cut to the dark screen. It fades in to reveal an SUV driving down the highway. It is late evening and the date “October 30, 2000” appears. Driving the SUV is Kara Strode. In the passenger seat is Tommy Doyle reading an occult book entitled “The Druids.” In the back seat is Danny Strode listening to a walkman. He is now a preteen. Kara glances over at Tommy, then back to the road. She then looks behind her to see Danny occupied by his walkman. She looks back to the road and speaks up.

Kara Strode: “I can’t believe this is happening again.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #3  
Old 06-27-2012, 05:00 PM
Helloween - Part 2

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Tommy puts the occult book down and turns to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “I know. Neither can I.”

Kara Strode: “How long did you know?”

-Tommy turns to Kara questionably, then looks behind him to make sure Danny is occupied by his walkman. He turns back to Kara and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Longer than three weeks if that’s what you’re wondering. You could see right through me when I told you last night, couldn’t you?”

Kara Strode: “I’m a psychologist. I’ve been able to see through you the last year.”

Tommy Doyle: “I bet you have. I didn’t enjoy lying to you that long, and then lying about that last night, but I didn’t look forward to putting you through this nonsense again. Believe me, I’m tired of it too. And when I found that Thorn came back this year, I knew I had to tell you.”

Kara Strode: “I understand. So, before you received those anonymous emails, how did you know that we weren’t safe in witness protection?”

Tommy Doyle: “You really want to know?”

Kara Strode: “Yeah.”

Tommy Doyle: “Up until a year ago, I felt safe. I felt like I was finally living a normal life. Even though I was no longer Tommy Doyle, I was finally me again after so long. And I was getting closer to you and Danny. But especially closer to you. Well, that’s when I began to see everything around me a lot more clearly. I began to notice the same things. The same people every morning. The same people during the day. What I saw were not people on the way to their jobs. I saw people who were following me, watching me and spying on me. I saw it in their mannerisms. In their lack of emotion. It felt like ‘Invasion of The Body Snatchers’.”

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh…”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m serious. I’m not making this up.”

Kara Strode: “No, I believe you.”

Tommy Doyle: “You know what happened when I started watching them? I stopped seeing them. You know why I stopped seeing them? Because they knew I was onto them.”

Kara Strode: “Is it possible they were watching me and Danny also?”

Tommy Doyle: “Going by those weird emails, I’m sure they were watching both of you as well. This could be the reason all three of us were relocated in the same town and in the same neighborhood. Ordinarily, I’m sure they would have relocated me separately.”

Danny Strode: “Really?”

-Kara and Tommy both turn back to Danny.

Kara Strode: “Danny, you were listening?”

Danny Strode: “I couldn’t help it. When you kept looking back, I knew you were talking about me.”

-Kara turns to Danny in disbelief, then looks back to the road. Tommy shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “He has a right to know. He’s experienced it firsthand.”

Danny Strode: “Exactly. I don’t want to be kept out of the dark. I want to know everything that’s going on.”

-Kara looks on for a moment and sighs. Finally, she turns back to Danny.

Kara Strode: “All right. You are my smart, little boy after all. You deserve to know.”

Danny Strode: “Thank you.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, if you’ve heard everything so far, I think you can handle the rest.”

Danny Strode: “Okay.”

-Tommy turns to Danny, then Kara. He then continues.

Tommy Doyle: “After I stopped seeing them, things returned to normal. I wanted to think everything was back to normal. And then, in the last few weeks, I began noticing them again. On the way to my job. Outside of the diner. Everywhere. And I got this awful feeling that Thorn might come back this year. After all, it has been five years. It has to show itself again sooner or later. And it did.”

Kara Strode: “Will you be able to stop them?”

Danny Strode: “Yeah, will you?”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t know yet…”

-Tommy picks up the occult book.

Tommy Doyle: “…That’s why I’m reading this. I’m learning more about their culture than I cared to know five years ago. By tomorrow tonight, I hope to have the answer to stopping Michael and freeing ourselves of the cult. Once and for all.”

-Cut to a motel later on in the late evening. In room ten is Kara laying on a bed and reading the occult book. In room eleven is Danny and Tommy laying on separate beds and watching “The Thing” From 1982.

Tommy Doyle: “…I don’t know how you can still watch stuff like this.”

Danny Strode: “I’m sure you still did when you were my age.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, sure. Matter of fact, I saw this in the theater back then. I would have been the same age as you.”

Danny Strode: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah. I recall a friend older than me getting me in. This is much better on the big-screen than on this puny TV. And not to mention, not cut.”

Danny Strode: “You’re right about that. They leave out the best parts.”

Tommy Doyle: “So, why still watch it?”

Danny Strode: “Why not?”

-Tommy shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “I know what you mean.”

-Both of them look on at the TV for a moment. Danny then speaks up.

Danny Strode: “I thought you said you didn’t have any friends back then.”

Tommy Doyle: “I didn’t really. Except for a neighbor. Drew Mackenzie. After my first encounter with Michael, and after Lindsey Wallace moved away…”

Danny Strode: “Right, Lindsey Wallace…”

Tommy Doyle: “…He was always there for me when I needed someone to talk to. He was sixteen during that particular Halloween and he was really cool. He was like a big brother. He helped me get into a lot of rated R movies.”

Danny Strode: “No way.”

Tommy Doyle: “More importantly, he was close enough to my age group to socialize with.”

Danny Strode: “Oh?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah.”

-Both of them look on at the TV for a moment. Danny rolls his eyes. He knows what Tommy’s getting at. Tommy then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Tell me, do you have any friends your age, or close to your age, at school? In witness protection?”

-Danny looks on at the TV for a moment, then speaks up.

Danny Strode: “Not really.”

Tommy Doyle: “So, you don’t.”

Danny Strode: “No.”

Tommy Doyle: “Except for me.”

Danny Strode: “Well, yeah.”

-Tommy stops there and looks on at the TV for another moment. He then continues.

Tommy Doyle: “Listen…”

-Danny sighs.

Danny Strode: “I’ve heard this before from my mom. I’d rather not hear it from you.”

Tommy Doyle: “I think you do.”

Danny Strode: “Why?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think you know why. Five years ago, you experienced something extraordinary. Something beyond any average kid’s imagination. Even including my own experience in 1978. You saw a lot more darkness than I ever did before 1995. And you were placed in witness protection and told never to speak about it. To keep a secret like that from other kids is a big burden. It’s a burden I learned the hard way. After I first saw Michael, I never stopped talking about it. Part of the reason could be because I no longer had Lindsey Wallace to talk to. Another reason could be my wild imagination. Even though I saw little of what happened that night, I never forgot about…him. How could I? And how can you forget everything you’ve witnessed? I’m not expecting you to. All I’m suggesting is to try finding a new interest and move on.”

Danny Strode: “You didn’t.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s true. And I blame myself for setting that example for you. When we entered witness protection, I did try to move on and I did. But I should have encouraged you to do the same. But I didn’t. After how I grew up, I should have recognized the symptoms and pointed you in the right direction.”

-Danny sighs of frustration and gets up from his bed.

Danny Strode: “What are you, a psychologist like my mom? You’re not my father, you didn’t have to tell me how to grow up. I didn’t follow you as an example. I looked at you as a friend. I chose to stick with horror movies and unsolved mysteries all by myself. Because it’s all I knew. After what I experienced on Halloween, there was no going back. They stole my childhood. I already knew that there was no Easter Bunny and Santa Claus, so there was no sense in making friends with kids who still believed in them. How am I supposed to move on when I already know a lot more about the world than I would wish to know? They stole everything from me.”

-Danny looks on, then sits back down on his bed and sighs. Tommy gets up from the other bed and sits up. He faces Danny for a moment, then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Except for your life. And your right to choose your own destiny.”

Danny Strode: “What do you mean?”

Tommy Doyle: “Obviously, you’re old enough by now to realize what Dr. Wynn had in mind for you. Have you since seen any weird visions? Have you felt that intuition of darkness around you?”

Danny Strode: “No.”

Tommy Doyle: “I didn’t think so. That’s because I believe you are no longer inflicted with Thorn. Not anymore. When we prevented the cult from fulfilling Thorn’s destiny five years ago, we broke their prophecy. Michael is no longer supposed to pass Thorn on to you. Instead, that ‘rite of passage’ has been handed over to some other unlucky kid.”

Danny Strode: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes.”

Danny Strode: “So, some other kid is stuck with it now?”

Tommy Doyle: “I would think so.”

Danny Strode: “And I’m free?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, but you’re still in danger. All of us are. What’s important is that you have the choice to fight back…that’s if you want to.”

-Danny looks on for a moment, then speaks up.

Danny Strode: “I do.”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m glad to hear that.”

-Tommy looks on for a moment, then gets up.

Tommy Doyle: “Well, it’s getting late. Don’t stay up too late. We have to wake up early tomorrow morning if we’re going to make it to Haddonfield.”

Danny Strode: “Sure.”

-Tommy walks over to the door. He opens it and then turns to Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “Good night…don’t let the bed bugs bite.”

-Danny shrugs.

Danny Strode: “There are no such things as bed bugs.”

Tommy Doyle: “Of course not.”

-Tommy steps out of the room and shuts the door. As he does, Danny mutters to himself.

Danny Strode: “Except for the Boogeyman.”

-Cut to room ten. The door opens and Tommy walks in. He shuts the door and walks over to the other bed.

Tommy Doyle: “I had the big talk with Danny.”

-Kara puts the occult book down and sits up.

Kara Strode: “I heard.”

-Tommy sits down on the other bed and turns to Kara questionably.

Tommy Doyle: “You did?”

Kara Strode: “This is a motel, not a hotel. The walls are paper-thin.”

Tommy Doyle: “Right…”

Kara Strode: “I heard him when he yelled at you. And I knew.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, you’ll be glad to know that Danny has a lot of negative emotions out of his system. By tomorrow, he should be as good as new.”

Kara Strode: “I tried so many times to get through to him. I should have realized that he needed to hear it from the father figure he never had.”

Tommy Doyle: “There’s more to it than that.”

Kara Strode: “There is?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. After what I read in the book today, I found out something very important. You’ll be very relieved to hear it.”

Kara Strode: “What is it?”

Tommy Doyle: “Danny is free. He is no longer inflicted with Thorn.”

-Kara looks on at Tommy for a moment, then shrugs.

Kara Strode: “You’re kidding! I can’t believe it!”

-Kara gets up from her bed and hugs Tommy. Both of them fall back on his bed (Thwump!) and Kara sighs of relief.

Kara Strode: “My baby is free of that goddamn cult!”

-Tommy, closer to Kara than ever before, shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “That’s right!”

-Kara picks herself off of Tommy and turns to him questionably.

Kara Strode: “But what does that mean? That it’s over once we fight back?”

Tommy Doyle: “No. It means that another unlucky kid is now inflicted with Thorn. And even if we defy Thorn tomorrow and win, another kid will be inflicted down the road and it will start all over again.”

Kara Strode: “So, they plan on doing this all over again?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. It’s been going on for years. For decades and centuries. Since forever. That’s what I’ve been learning from the book. It only became known to the outside world when the case of Michael Myers became famous…and infamous. I don’t think we’ll ever be able to stop them from what they’re doing. But maybe we can stop them this Halloween and save another child from becoming the next Boogeyman. Maybe we can break their prophecy.”

Kara Strode: “Maybe. But what can we do to fight back? Do you know?”

Tommy Doyle: “After everything I’ve read in the last few days and today, I have an idea how.”

Kara Strode: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. I don’t think it’s impossible to stop them and free Michael of Thorn.”

Kara Strode: “Free him of Thorn?”

Tommy Doyle: “Obviously, you’re not that far in the book. Yes. Free him of Thorn. Free him of the evil. If you’re willing to accept that Thorn tried to take possession of Danny, you have to accept that Michael’s soul has been in possession of Thorn all this time. You may not want to hear it, but he is not responsible for murdering your family. Thorn is.”

-Kara turns to Tommy for a moment, then finally gets off of him. She gets up from the bed and walks around the room. Tommy sits back up and watches as she paces back and forth. She then stops in her tracks and sighs.

Kara Strode: “You’re right. For a long time, I have suppressed those feelings. I didn’t want to believe it. I didn’t want to believe what Danny was seeing. And I didn’t want to believe what they had planned for him either.”

Tommy Doyle: “It is scary stuff.”

Kara Strode: “It wasn’t Michael. It was Thorn.”

-Kara looks on for a moment. She then suddenly walks back over to her bed and picks up the occult book. She opens to a page Tommy marked with a pen and the camera focuses on it: Wunjo – warmth, pleasure, harmony, joy…

-She shows the open page to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Is it this? Is this how you plan to stop Thorn?”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s part of it. Out of the twenty-five Runes, it is the opposite of Thorn. By using the power of Wunjo, I might be able to free Michael of Thorn’s power.”

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh…”

-Kara sits down next to Tommy on the same bed.

Kara Strode: “…Do you think it will work?”

Tommy Doyle: “It might. I still have to read more to find out.”

-Kara lays back on Tommy’s bed.

Kara Strode: “Then, let’s find out together.”

Tommy Doyle: “You sure you want to? One of us will have to get enough sleep tonight, so we can get to Haddonfield tomorrow and be ready for them.”

Kara Strode: “Sleep is the last thing I’m worried about right now. I’m more worried about you, Danny, and God forbid, Stephen Lloyd.”

Tommy Doyle: “All right.”

-Tommy lays next to Kara and both of the begin reading the occult book together. Back in room eleven, Danny is finished watching “The Thing.” He gets into bed and reaches over to switch off the light. As he switches off the light (Flick!), the screen fades to black.

-Cut to the dark screen. It fades in to reveal the motel. The date “October 31, 2000” appears. Cut to room ten. Laying in the same bed and surprisingly well-rested are Kara and Tommy. Closer to Tommy then she ever has before, she snuggles up to him under the covers and sighs.

Kara Strode: “I don’t want to get out of bed. I want to find out that I’m in a dream and wake up back home.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know you do. I know.”

Kara Strode: “It wasn’t easy falling asleep last night. Not even with you. Are they here? Do they know where we’re staying? What if they come after us as soon as we’re asleep?”

Tommy Doyle: “The good news is that they didn’t. And the not so good news is that today is now Halloween. If we’re going to take our lives back, it’s today.”

Kara Strode: “I guess so. The only good thing about this trip is…last night.”

Tommy Doyle: “You mean, when I got through to Danny?”

Kara Strode: “Well, that too. But what I mean is…”

-Kara turns to Tommy suggestively.

Kara Strode: “…Last night.”

Tommy Doyle: “Oh. You mean…”

-Tommy turns to Kara suggestively.

Tommy Doyle: “…Last night…”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #4  
Old 06-27-2012, 05:11 PM
Helloween - Part 3

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Kara Strode: “Yeah…it was worth the wait.”

Tommy Doyle: “Was it?”

Kara Strode: “It was. We waited so long. Well, I did.”

Tommy Doyle: “Hey, so did I.”

Kara Strode: “Did you?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. Really. It’s not like, after getting to know you for four years, I suddenly became distant because I was I unsure of my own capabilities. You know why now I became distant. Because of them.”

Kara Strode: “Yeah, I know.”

Tommy Doyle: “I can add one more good thing coming out of this trip.”

Kara Strode: “And what’s that?”

Tommy Doyle: “We may no longer have to live in witness protection. We’ll be free to be ourselves. We’ll know longer live with a sense of uncertainty in the back of our minds.”

Kara Strode: “What does that mean? That if we defy Thorn, they won’t go after us?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think so. They’ll leave us alone. It might mean that we’ll have to keep their dark secret from the rest of the outside world, but I can live with it.”

Kara Strode: “If that’s true, so can I.”

Tommy Doyle: “Come on, let’s not waste any time. We have to get to Haddonfield and prepare for tonight.”

-Kara and Tommy both begin getting out of bed.

Kara Strode: “Once we’re there, do you have a plan?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. If my old house is still empty, I thought we’d use it to set a trap against...”

Kara Strode: “Tommy…”

-As Tommy slips on a pair of jeans, he turns to Kara questionably. She is still laying in the bed and can’t get her eyes off of an envelope by the door. Tommy follows her line of vision and looks over to the envelope. He turns back to Kara and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “I’ll go see what it is.”

-Kara stays in bed, while Tommy walks over to the door. He steps up to it and picks up the envelope. He walks back over to the bed and sits beside Kara. Both of them look down at the envelope. Tommy reluctantly begins tearing it open. He tears it open and looks inside. He reaches in and pulls out a folded-up paper. He then looks back in again. He takes hold of the other end of the envelope and empties its remaining contents onto the bed. As Kara discovers, two I.D.’s fall out. Each of them identify “Kara Strode” and “Tommy Doyle.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, I guess we now have proof of who are…”

Kara Strode: “What does that say?...”

-Tommy turns to Kara, then to the folded-up paper. He slowly and reluctantly unfolds it. And as he and Kara both to read, narration is heard.

Melinda Wynn (narrating): “You’re almost home. We hope you are enjoying this vacation so far. Stephen Lloyd is. If you choose to stay away, it won’t change his fate. Whether you show up or not, we plan on sacrificing him tonight. And if you do stay away, we will find you again. Happy Halloween.”

-Cut to a diner later on in the morning. After a waitress walks away with their orders, Kara and Tommy turn to Danny.

Kara Strode: “We have to tell you something. First, there’s no reason to be scared. Or anymore scared than you were yesterday.”

Danny Strode: “What is it?”

-Kara turns to Tommy, and he pulls out the paper from the envelope. He hands it over to Danny. As Danny begins reading it, Tommy speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “They know where we are. They’ve always known where we’ve been the last five years, but they know where we are right now. They know that we’re close to Haddonfield. Listen to your mom. There really is no reason to more afraid than you were yesterday. We’re telling you, because you have the right to know.”

-Danny puts the paper down and turns to them.

Danny Strode: “Well, thanks for telling me. And I’m actually less scared now than I was yesterday.”

Kara Strode: “I’m glad to hear that.”

Danny Strode: “Where is Stephen Lloyd? Why did they take him away from us?”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, it was child services that took him away from us when we entered witness protection. But it doesn’t really matter, does it? It may as well be them. They did, after all, relocate all three of us in the same town. They clearly have us where they want us at the moment. What matters is that we find a way to turn the table on them and beat them at their own game tonight.”

Danny Strode: “Do you know how?”

-Tommy turns to Kara, then back to Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. We both read up on it, and we have a good idea how to stop the cult and free Michael of Thorn.”

Kara Strode: “I don’t think we have to worry about that. We just have to make sure they don’t trick us.”

Tommy Doyle: “There’s just one thing we have left to tell you. Once we get to Haddonfield, don’t be too trusting of strangers. We don’t know whose part of the cult and who isn’t.”

-Cut to the dark screen. It fades in to reveal a familiar small town. Specifically a familiar block of businesses and stores. To the left and right are corner stores and up ahead is the entrance into the neighborhood. The corner store to the right is a hardware store. The same one Michael once stole a Halloween mask from, as well as a couple of knives.

-It is late morning. The words “Haddonfield, Illinois” appear. The word “Halloween” appears after. The understated version of the “Halloween” theme begins playing. It is the beginning of a new day and the citizens of the small town are opening shop.

-That’s when the camera begins panning forward. It pans past the lights and into the first block of the neighborhood. As it pans down the block, it passes ordinary houses to the left and right.

-The screen eventually fades out and then back in to reveal the camera panning down a second block. To the left and right are ordinary houses. The screen eventually fades out and then back in to reveal the camera panning down a third block. To the left and right are ordinary houses.

-The screen eventually fades out and then back in to reveal the camera panning down a fourth block. To the left are ordinary houses, but to the right is something far from ordinary. The camera pans away from the street and over to the right. It pans onto, none other than, The Myers house. The same house Judith Myers lived in for the entirety of her life. The same house Michael Myers lived in for the first six years of his life. The same house Laurie Strode lived in for the first two years of her life.

-It is also same house Laurie’s adoptive father was unable to sell. The same house her adoptive uncle moved into with his family as a favor to his brother. And he same house he, his wife and son paid for in blood. Since then, the house remains unowned and empty. Or does it?

-Set up in front of the house is a porch. To the left and right are windows, and in the middle is a door. On the second floor are left and right windows. Boarded over all the windows, as well as the door, are pieces of wood. The Strode’s didn’t have much of a chance to renovate the house in their short time living in it and it shows. Since then, there’s been riots by the community and it’s looking worse for wear. The age and deterioration shows.

-The screen eventually fades out and then back in to reveal the camera panning down a fifth block. To the left and right are ordinary houses. The screen eventually fades out and then back in to reveal the camera panning down a sixth block. As before, there are ordinary houses to the left and right. But among them are two more houses that stick out like thumbs.

-To the left side of the street is the Doyle house. Set up in the middle of the home is a balcony. To the left and right of the ground floor are windows. In the middle is the front door. On the second floor are four windows, and a door in the middle leading to the balcony. And just like the Myers house, but to a lesser extent, it appears aged and deteriorated.

-To the right side of the street is the Wallace house. Set up in front of it is a porch with a balcony on top. To the left of the ground floor is a window. To the right of it is the front door. And on the second floor are two windows. Just like the Doyle house, nobody has lived in it since 1978, and nobody has bothered to take care of it either.

-The screen eventually fades out and then back in to reveal the camera panning down town. To the left and right are businesses and stores. Among the businesses to the right is motel. As the camera pans up to it, and as an SUV pulls into its parking lot, the understated “Halloween” theme tones down. The SUV stops in front of the manager’s office. Kara, Danny and Tommy all step out (Slam! Slam! Slam!).

Tommy Doyle: “Well, we’re here. Let’s not waste any time. Let’s get ourselves a room and then go see my old house.”

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the morning. An SUV pulls up to the Doyle house. It parks on the side of the road and ignition is shut off (…Rrrrr…). Kara, Danny and Tommy step out (Slam! Slam! Slam!) and look up at the house. Tommy looks at the outside appearance of the house. As the age and deterioration tells him, it isn’t looking better than it did five years earlier.

Tommy Doyle: “After all this time, nothing’s changed.”

Danny Strode: “Home sweet home…”

Tommy Doyle: “It doesn’t look so welcoming now, but that’s where I grew up. Until that Halloween. Afterwards, my family moved out of it and into another house in the neighborhood.”

-Danny turns around and looks at the Wallace house.

Danny Strode: “And that’s where Lindsey Wallace lived, isn’t it?”

-Tommy turns around and looks at the Wallace house. He is no more surprised by its outside appearance.

Tommy Doyle: “You’ve definitely been listening to my stories, haven’t you? That’s it. Her house hasn’t changed either.”

Kara Strode: “Who’s Lindsey Wallace?”

Tommy Doyle: “She was a neighbor I grew up with. Until that Halloween. Afterwards, her family also moved away but completely out of Haddonfield. I never saw her again.”

-Tommy turns his attention back to the Doyle house, then over to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “I want to take a look.”

-Tommy starts walking up the front lawn, while the others begin following after. Tommy walks up front window to the left. He stops and looks inside. The others catch up and he speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “There’s the living room. Clearly, nobody has been in there for years. Not to take care of it or to renovate it.”

Kara Strode: “How long has it been? Twenty-two years? Are people really that afraid?”

Tommy Doyle: “If so, they have every right to be.”

Danny Strode: “So, this is where it all happened.”

Tommy Doyle: “Here, and also at the house across the street. I remember it vividly. I didn’t really see a whole lot, but I saw him…”

-Tommy turns to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “…Laurie Strode, who you would have been cousins with, and Annie Brackett were babysitting me and Lindsey. Annie was taking care of Lindsey, and she wound up dropping Lindsey off to stay with us. Annie was the sheriff’s daughter back then. I never saw her again after that night. Nobody did. It was tragic. In a way, I never saw Laurie again either. She was never the same.”

Kara Strode: “According to my mother, she became distant after the experience. And slipped deeper into paranoia after every Halloween to pass. Until she was killed. God rest her soul.”

Tommy Doyle: “And Jamie Lloyd’s.”

-All three of them look on into the living room for a moment. Tommy then steps back and starts walking over to the opposite window. The others follow him past the door and over to the window to the right. They stop and look inside the dining room. Revealed beyond it is the kitchen.

Tommy Doyle: “There’s the dining room and the kitchen. Now that I recall, the kitchen was too small to eat in. We ate in the dining room and used it as an extension of the kitchen.”

-All three of them continue looking inside for a moment. Tommy then starts walking away. He steps back a few feet then stops. He looks all the way up at the house and shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “Man. The things I’m suddenly remembering. The things I’ll remember on the second floor.”

-The others walk over to him and also look up at house. Kara looks up at it, then turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Are you sure this is what you want to do?”

Tommy Doyle: “Would you rather set a trap in the Myers house?”

-Cut to town later on in the morning. Cut to the realty office. Tommy steps out with the keys to the Doyle house and walks over to the SUV. He gets inside (Slam!) and turns to Kara and Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “That was easy. I just told them I planned on renovating my old house and they didn’t give it a second thought.”

Kara Strode: “You were really quick. You don’t think that they…”

Tommy Doyle: “Try not to think about it. Let’s just be glad that we have access to my old house.”

Kara Strode: “Right…”

Tommy Doyle: “Now, we just have to go inside it and find out how much work it needs.”

-Cut to town later on in the morning. Cut to the hardware store. An SUV pulls up to it and parks (…Rrrrr…). Kara, Danny and Tommy step out of the SUV (Slam! Slam! Slam!) and walk over to the store. They walk in on and look around. Tommy then turns to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “Okay, I think we’ll need one of those over there, and that too…”

Kara Strode: “Okay…”

-Kara, as unsure as Tommy is with the surrounding tools, wanders over to a shelf to the right.

Tommy Doyle: “Danny, you’re a growing a boy. And you’re strong. Go over there and get me some of those slats of wood.”

Danny Strode: “Sure…”

-Danny wanders over to a shelf to the left. Tommy then begins wandering over to another shelf to the right. As he does, the camera slowly pans from the front of the store to the counter in the back. Standing behind the counter is none other than Drew Mackenzie. It eventually pans up to the counter, where Tommy unloads a hammer and a box of nails. Tommy immediately looks up at the tools on the back wall, while Drew looks on at him very oddly.

Tommy Doyle: “Hi, can I have one of those up there? By that hammer?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Tommy?”

-Tommy stops and looks back down at Drew. At the same time, Kara and Danny walk up to the counter with their own supplies.

Tommy Doyle: “Drew.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I thought that was you. It’s been five years. Where have you been?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’ve been away. Trying to clear my head and get my life back in order.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, I hope you have. We were worried about you. Well, I was.”

Tommy Doyle: “Thanks for the concern. I am doing better now. And being back in Haddonfield is…different. For one, you apparently run the hardware store now.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I do. Mr. Barker retired a couple of years ago and handed it over to me.”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s only fitting. After he taught you to be a contractor.”

Drew Mackenzie: “It is, isn’t it?”

-Drew can’t help but notice Kara. He turns to her questionably.

Drew Mackenzie: “Have I seen you before?”

Kara Strode: “Um, I don’t think so…”

Tommy Doyle: “Uh, right. Drew, this is Kara and Danny. They’re friends of the family. Kara and Danny, this is Drew Mackenzie. I grew up with him…”

-Tommy turns to Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “…This is who I told you about last night.”

Danny Strode: “Hey, Drew…”

Kara Strode: “Hi, Drew. It’s nice to meet you.”

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s nice to meet both of you. And it’s nice to know that Tommy’s been talking about me…”

-Drew turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “…So, anyway, what on earth are you working on? From the looks of it, you don’t even look like you know what you’re looking for in here.”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t. Believe it or not, I’m renovating my old house.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Seriously?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes.”

Drew Mackenzie: “On Halloween?”

Tommy Doyle: “Why not? I’m not afraid. Not anymore.”

Danny Strode: “Nope.”

Drew Mackenzie: “So, what does this mean? That you’re back for good?”

Tommy Doyle: “Maybe.”

Drew Mackenzie: “What do you mean, maybe? You suddenly come back to renovate your old house, and you don’t even know if you’ll move back in?”

Tommy Doyle: “As crazy as that sounds, yes. Call it, uh, spontaneity. It’s my own crazy way of coping with the past and moving on. Hell, maybe I will move back in when I’m done. Who knows if I will.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, I guess that doesn’t sound any less unusual than something you would do in the past. Welcome back.”

Tommy Doyle: “Thanks.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Uh, yeah. So, what exactly do you plan on doing? Do you actually know how to handle those tools?”

-Kara and Tommy look down at the supplies both of them have set on the counter, then over to the slats of wood still in Danny’s hands. They then turn to each other, then finally turn back to Drew.

Kara and Tommy: “No.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I didn’t think so. How about I come over to the house and have a look for myself?”

-Kara and Tommy turn to each other questionably. Should they get Drew involved or not?

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-27-2012 at 05:13 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #5  
Old 06-27-2012, 05:26 PM
Helloween - Part 4

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the morning. Cut to the Doyle house. The front door opens and Drew walks right in. Kara, Danny and Tommy step in after. Tommy shuts the door, while Drew looks around. Up ahead and all the way to the left is the living room. In the middle of it, and left over from 1978, is a couch. Up ahead, and beyond the living room, is the entrance leading to the den in the back. And to the right is the entrance to the dining room.

Drew Mackenzie: “Look at this…”

-Drew turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “…You got a lot work ahead. A lot of work. And this is just the living room.”

Tommy Doyle: “Oh, I know. But that is what makes it fun.”

-Drew looks on for a moment, then starts stepping forward. He walks over to the dining room entrance. He steps in and looks around. He steps into the middle and looks over to the entrance leading to the kitchen in the back. All the way in the back is a door to the back yard.

-Drew steps out of the dining room and back into the living room. The others watch as he walks over to the den. He walks in and looks around. To the right is a closet. To the left is the stairs leading to the second floor. And further to the left is a bathroom. Drew steps back into the living room and turns to the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “First of all, I didn’t need to step into the kitchen to immediately recognize that it’s small. The dining room might as well be an extension to it. Second of all, it looks to me that the kitchen and dining room are both smaller than you typically see in a house, because of how much extra large the living room is. And on top of that, you have the unstrategically placed den taking up room that should belong to the kitchen. All in all, I like it. It’s different from the norm.”

Tommy Doyle: “You were right on the money. Just wait `til you see the upstairs.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Oh, I can’t wait.”

-Drew starts walking back over to the den. He walks in and first steps over to the open bathroom. He then walks over to the stairs and starts making his way to the second floor. Back in the living room, Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “What do we tell him?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m not sure yet.”

Kara Strode: “Should we tell him? Can we trust him?”

Danny Strode: “After what you told me last night, it sounds like we can.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know we can trust him. I grew up with him.”

Kara Strode: “Didn’t you say he was a contractor in the store?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. Mr. Barker used to run the store and he trained Drew how to use tools. And now, he runs the store. He’s resourceful. He would know how to set up the house and fool Michael. I would just rather not get him involved and put him in danger.”

Kara Strode: “Without him, would you know how to set up the house and fool Michael on your own?”

-Tommy turns to Kara questionably, then looks on for a moment.

-Upstairs, Drew climbs from the top step to the hallway. The first thing he takes notice of is the open bedroom door to his right. He peeks inside and takes a look. He then steps over to the hallway turning back. The first thing on that hallway is an open doorway to a second bedroom. Drew steps over to it and looks inside.

Drew Mackenzie: “Huh…”

-Drew steps away from the doorway and walks down the hallway. He reaches the end of the first hallway and discovers two new hallways leading to the left and right. He first looks over to the next hallway leading to the left and past the railing. He then turns his attention to the open doorway leading to the bathroom along that hallway. He steps up to it and looks inside.

Drew Mackenzie: “Cool…”

-Drew steps away from the doorway and over to the opposite hallway leading to the right. He walks in and finds an open entrance to two bedrooms. The one to the right is another point of entry into the second bedroom. The one to the left leads to the third bedroom. Drew walks right in and looks around. To his right are the doors leading to the balcony. Notably, the binding doors to the closet are broken through. Drew steps back into the hallway.

-Drew steps back into the main hallway. He passes the open doorway of the bathroom and to the end of the hallway. Beyond it is another hallway leading to the right. Drew turns the corner and steps on into next hallway. Along the hallway are two back windows. Drew reaches the end of the hallway and beyond it is another hallway leading to the right.

-The first thing on the next hallway is the open doorway to the fourth bedroom. Drew steps up to it and looks inside. He then steps away from it and makes his way down the hallway. Along the hallway is another point of entry into the bathroom. Drew steps up to the open doorway and looks inside. As he observed from the opposite doorway, this is a unique shortcut through the second floor.

Drew Mackenzie: “Cool…”

-Drew then walks to the end of the hallway. Beyond it, leading to the left, is one more hallway leading to a dead-end. And the first thing on the last hallway is the open doorway to the fifth and final bedroom. Drew steps up to it and looks inside.

Drew Mackenzie: “Huh…”

-Back downstairs are Kara, Danny and Tommy in the living room.

Tommy Doyle: “…At this point, we could lie to him and go our separate ways. That’s what I would prefer to do. To keep him out of this. But I’m not going to lie. I’m not as resourceful with tools as I am with understanding Thorn and figuring out how to stop it. I’ve looked at the whole house, I’ve lived in it. And for the life of me, I have no idea what to do with it. Other that following the book, we need to surprise Michael with traps. To take him by surprise. And I’m not that resourceful. Drew is…”

-Tommy turns to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “…You run a household all by yourself. Tell me, after looking around the house, do you have any ideas? Are you anymore resourceful than I am in this department?”

Kara Strode: “I don’t think so. I’ve thought about it, but I’ve got no ideas in particular. Running a household is not the same thing as rigging a house with traps. That’s why I asked you.”

Danny Strode: “What about the upstairs? What about both bathroom doors and the longer way around?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’ve thought about that. I used to play hide-and-seek up there as a kid. I’ve tried picturing hide-and-seek with Michael and somehow outsmarting him, but I’ve got nothing at the moment.”

-Drew walks in from the den and turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “You weren’t lying about the upstairs. It is just as radical as the ground floor. I especially like the shortcut through the bathroom. You can either cut right through or go the long way around. It’s brilliant!”

Tommy Doyle: “I know, right? Imagine playing hide-and-seek up there. Lindsey Wallace and I did all the time when we were kids.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I can see that. Anyway, I can tell you right away that your house is still in one piece. It isn’t going anywhere. Beyond that, I would recommend that you start down here in the living room or den...”

-As Drew goes on, Tommy turns to the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “…I would suggest both since you have a little team here. Then, there’s the kitchen. I have yet to look closely at that, but I can tell you right now…”

-Tommy turns to Drew and cuts in.

Tommy Doyle: “Drew, I have to tell you something.”

-Drew turns to Tommy questionably.

Drew Mackenzie: “What is it?”

Tommy Doyle: “We’re not really planning on renovating my old house.”

Drew Mackenzie: “You’re not?”

Tommy Doyle: “No…”

-Tommy turns to the others, then back to Drew.

Tommy Doyle: “…Do you remember Mr. Strode moving his brother’s family into the Myers house five years ago?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Of course, I do.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, I want you to meet Kara and Danny Strode.”

-Drew turns to Kara and Danny for a moment, then back to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “Oh my gosh…”

-Drew turns back to others, particularly Kara.

Drew Mackenzie: “…That’s why I recognize you. It was your family who moved in that godforsaken house.”

Kara Strode: “That’s right. Only Danny and I survived that Halloween…thanks to Tommy.”

-Drew looks on at Kara and Danny, then turns back to Tommy questionably.

Tommy Doyle: “The reason I’ve been away so long is because I saw Michael Myers that Halloween. I knew they were in danger and rescued them. We’ve been away in hiding ever since.”

Drew Mackenzie: “You’re kidding?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m not.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Wow. I never would have thought…”

-Drew looks on in disbelief than, then continues.

Drew Mackenzie: “…If you didn’t come back to renovate your old house, what are you really doing back here? What are all of you doing back in Haddonfield?”

Tommy Doyle: “We came back to stop Michael Myers. We want to put an end to him and every bad thing associated with Halloween.”

Kara Strode: “More importantly, we want our lives back.”

-Drew turns to Kara, then back to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “Wow. You’re serious, aren’t you?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, we are.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, why did you decide to tell me?”

Tommy Doyle: “Because you’re the only person I trust. And also because we could use your help. Clearly, none of us know our way around tools. And it won’t be easy outwitting Michael Myers. We have to be able to surprise him, and it will take more than an empty house to do that. We’ll need booby traps. And you’re the first person I know who is resourceful enough for that. If you don’t want in, I understand.”

-Drew turns away from Tommy and shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “Wow, what did I walk into?...”

-Drew looks on for a moment, then turns back to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “You know what, I’m in. You’re not the only one who wants to put an end to all the bullshit. So do I. And so does everyone else in town. That son of a gun has not been seen in five years. We don’t know if he’s still here or not. We don’t know if it’s safe. If he is still here, let’s get him. Let’s get him tonight.”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m glad you feel that way.”

Kara Strode: “Me, too.”

Tommy Doyle: “If anything, I just hope you’re not feeling obligated to, because I walked you through the door.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Nonsense. If I heard that you came back and planned this on your own, I’d want in. More importantly, if anything happened, and I didn’t hear about it until tomorrow, I wouldn’t know what to do with myself. I’m glad that you came to me about it. I want to help.”

Tommy Doyle: “Really?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Yes.”

Tommy Doyle: “Then, I’m glad you’re on board.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Same here. Now, let me check out the upstairs again. Whatever we do, we have to plan some mean traps up there…”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m with you on that…”

-As Tommy and Drew start walking over to the den, Kara turns to Danny.

Kara Strode: “It’s really happening.”

Danny Strode: “It sure is. But he still doesn’t know everything yet.”

Kara Strode: “Maybe he won’t have to.”

-Cut to town later on in the morning. Cut to the hardware store. Tommy helps Drew drop in the last of the supplies in his truck. Drew starts walking back over to his store.

Drew Mackenzie: “That should be everything we’ll need.”

-Tommy watches as Drew opens the front door, turns off the lights, turns on the security, and then shuts the door. Drew locks the door (Click! Chi-ching!) and walks back over to his truck.

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, let’s go.”

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the early afternoon. Cut to the Doyle house. In one of the upstairs bedrooms are Kara and Danny working on a trap.

Kara Strode: “…Listen, when this is over, things are going to change at home. For the better. For all of us.”

Danny Strode: “Does that mean we’ll no longer be in hiding?”

Kara Strode: “According to Tommy, that might be true. If we defy Thorn, we may be free of it and the whole cult. They’ll have to leave us alone.”

Danny Strode: “So, I’ll no longer be Matthew Leighton. I’ll be Danny Strode again.”

Kara Strode: “If that’s what you want.”

Danny Strode: “It is. I don’t like lying to people about who I am. The more I’ve lied to people, the more confused I’ve become about my identity.”

Kara Strode: “I had no idea you felt that way. Is that why you’ve been acting out?”

Danny Strode: “Yeah.”

Kara Strode: “Well, I’m sorry if I did anything to make you feel that way. I’m sorry if I didn’t step in more and…”

Danny Strode: “You didn’t do anything wrong. I just didn’t have anyone on the outside I could trust or be friends with. When we first entered witness protection, I didn’t know if I could trust the other kids. I didn’t know if any of them they were…one of them. After a while, I got over that feeling and tried to become friends with the other kids. And it was hard to relate to them. They knew so little about the world and I knew so much. I know more about the world than they will ever know.”

Kara Strode: “You didn’t know how to move on, did you?”

Danny Strode: “No.”

Kara Strode: “Well, you should be able to move once this is all over. You’ll be yourself again. You won’t have to lie about your identity. And the nightmare will be over. You will still know how dark the outside world is, but hopefully it will easier to overcome that and accept the world for what it is. You’ll be free and you won’t have worry about the cult anymore. None of us will.”

Danny Strode: “No, we won’t.”

-Cut to later on in the early afternoon. In another bedroom are Tommy and Drew working on a trap.

Drew Mackenzie: “…I have to ask. How are you really doing nowadays?”

Tommy Doyle: “A lot better. Really. Five years ago, if you asked me that, I wouldn’t have given you a straight answer. I would have been more interested in talking about Michael Myers and any new discoveries in Halloween’s dark past. But since I’ve become part of Kara’s family, my perspective has changed.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I can tell. You’re involved with her, aren’t you?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah, I am. She’s the best thing that ever happened to me.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m glad to hear that.”

-Both of them continue working on the trap. Drew then speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “I have to ask you something. Did you come back this Halloween, knowing something was going to happen? Knowing that he was still here? Because I remember you acting really weird before Halloween five years ago.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #6  
Old 06-27-2012, 05:35 PM
Helloween - Part 5

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Tommy turns to Drew for a moment, wondering if he should tell him. He momentarily speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Well, five years ago, I was just plain weird. But, no. I didn’t come back this time, because I knew anything. We all decided to come back, hoping that he was still here, so that we could do something about it. And now that we’re here, we couldn’t be more anxious. We don’t want to wait another Halloween. We want to get out of hiding and take our lives back.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, you’re really brave. All of you are.”

-Cut to the dark screen. As it begins fading in, it ultimately reveals the camera panning away from back wall on the second floor of the Doyle house. The understated “Halloween” theme begins playing. The camera pans down the last hallway. It pans up to the end of the hallway and begins turning the corner. As it does, it passes the closed door to the fifth bedroom.

-The camera begins panning down the next hallway. It passes the closed door to the bathroom on the right. It then pans to the end of the hallway and begins turning the corner. As it does, it passes the closed door to the fourth bedroom.

-The camera begins panning down the next hallway. It passes a window to the left. It continues panning down the hallway. It passes another window to the left. It pans to the end of the hallway and turns the corner.

-The camera beings panning down the next hallway. It passes the other closed door to the bathroom to the right. It also begins passing the railing to the left. It pans nearly to the end of the hallway and begins turning a corner. As it does, it passes the hallway leading to the second and third bedrooms.

-The camera begins panning down the first hallway. It continues passing the railing to the left. It pans to the end of the hallway and begins turning the corner. As it does, it passes the closed door to the second bedroom.

-The camera pans all the way around to the stairs. And revealed in the open doorway of the first bedroom is Drew. He slowly steps back into the hallway and carefully shuts the door. He shuts the door and sighs of relief.
Drew Mackenzie: “Good. It’s all set.”

-As Drew starts stepping down the stairs, the understated “Halloween” theme begins toning down. He steps down into the den and walks out into living room. He greets the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, it’s all set. Good job everyone.”

Kara Strode: “We should be thanking you. If it weren’t for you, we wouldn’t have figured out how to surprise him.”

Drew Mackenzie: “True. But we all worked together on this. Every one of the traps is perfect. Good job…”

-Drew checks his watch and shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “…Well, look at that. It’s only 4:30. I told you we’d be ready by the late afternoon. We have plenty of time to eat, clean up, and get back here for the trap.”

Tommy Doyle: “We do. But first, let’s take a little walk.”

-Moments later, all four of them are walking down the neighborhood. Moments after that, they find themselves approaching the Myers house. They all take immediate notice of it. They stop in front of it and take a good look at the house.

-Cut to a point of view from inside the TV room. All four of them can be seen through the window. No one is seen or heard inside the house.

-Back outside, they continue looking at the Myers house. Tommy then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “I’m not afraid. Are the rest of you?”

Kara Strode: “I’m not, either.”

Danny Strode: “No way.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m not afraid one bit.”

-Cut back to the point of view from inside the house. No one is still not seen or heard.

-Back outside, Tommy speaks up again.

Tommy Doyle: “You know what, no matter what we say, I think we’re all a little afraid. But it doesn’t matter. With what we have planned, he’ll be more afraid of us.”

-They continue looking at the house. They then start walking away.

-Cut back to the point of view from inside the house. All four of them can be seen walking down the sidewalk and disappearing out sight. Heavy breathing is heard.

-Cut to town later on in the early evening. Cut to the motel. Getting ready in room seven are Kara and Tommy.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen, I’ve been thinking about this. I don’t think that you and Danny should be at the house with us tonight. You might be safer staying here at the motel.”

Kara Strode: “Safer? I know, as well as you do, that we aren’t safe here at all. We don’t just have Michael Myers to watch out for. There’s also a Druid cult, and anybody in town could be one of them. Why do you suddenly think we’d be safer here?”

Tommy Doyle: “Because I’m starting to wonder if the cult is actually here.”

Kara Strode: “Why?”

Tommy Doyle: “Because they made mistakes five years ago and almost exposed themselves to the outside world. They can’t risk that again. I have a feeling that they’re letting Thorn work alone, and are staying in the shadows this time.”

Kara Strode: “You think so?”

Tommy Doyle: “I have a good feeling about it.”

Kara Strode: “Well, even if that’s true, we don’t know for sure. And until we do, I would feel safer with you and others at the Doyle house than here.”

Tommy Doyle: “All right.”

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the early evening. Cut to the Doyle house. Walking past it and dressed in Halloween costumes are children accompanied by parents. An SUV pulls up to it and parks in the driveway (…Rrrrr…). Kara, Danny and Tommy step out of it (Slam! Slam! Slam!) and look around. They look up to the Doyle house. Tommy also looks over at the Wallace house across the street. He then turns to the others.

Tommy Doyle: “Well, this is it. This is what we’ve been waiting for.”

Danny Strode: “I can’t wait. After all this time, they’re going to pay.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, slow down there, buddy. Don’t get too anxious. We still don’t know what to expect tonight. It could go as planned, and it might not.”

Kara Strode: “Yeah, honey.”

Danny Strode: “I just want to put an end to it, that’s all.”

Tommy Doyle: “So do we. And does Drew. By the end of tonight, we plan for all of this nonsense to be over.”

-The three of them proceed to walk up to the house. Moments later, a truck pulls up to the house. It parks in the driveway (…Rrrrr…) and Drew steps out (Slam!). Grasping a hunting rifle, he stops and looks around. He then walks up to the house. He walks in under the balcony and knocks on the door. The door opens and Tommy answers.

Tommy Doyle: “Right on time.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I wouldn’t miss this for the world.”

-Drew walks right on in, while Tommy shuts the front door and locks it (Click! Chi-ching!). Tommy turns around and Drew speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “First things first, let’s move the couch into the den. Because I think you three are best off waiting in the back while I watch the front.”

Tommy Doyle: “Okay.”

-As Drew starts leading Tommy to the couch, he turns to Danny.

Drew Mackenzie: “Danny, give us a hand.”

Danny Strode: “Sure.”

-Tommy and Drew each take hold of the end of the couch, while Danny holds the middle. They carry it into the den and up to the back wall. They lower it to the wooden floor and Drew shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “One more thing.”

-Drew steps out of the den and back into the living room. He walks over to the dining room. He steps through the dining room and into the kitchen. He walks up to the back door and unlocks it (Click! Chi-ching!). Drew then walks back into the living room and turns to the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s all set. Now, we just have to wait.”

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the early evening. Cut to the Doyle house. Watching the front, and pacing back and forth from the living room to the dining room, is Drew. Waiting in the den is Kara, Danny and Tommy.

Danny Strode: “…I’ve got a weird feeling.”

-Kara and Tommy both turn to each other questionably, then turn to Danny.

Kara Strode: “You’re not seeing things, are you?”

Danny Strode: “No. But something in my gut is telling me something.”

Tommy Doyle: “What is it telling you?”

Danny Strode: “That something is wrong. That this is too good to be true.”

-Kara looks on at Danny, then turns to Tommy questionably. Could Danny still be feeling the weird sensations of Thorn? Tommy turns back to Danny and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Don’t worry. It’s just your nerves. You’re scared. All of us are. We’re this close to finally stopping Thorn. And now that you feel it, it’s scary to think about.”

Danny Strode: “I hope so.”

-Drew unexpectedly walks in.

Drew Mackenzie: “Hey, there’s something you should see.”

-All three of them turn to Drew questionably, then get up from the couch. Drew starts walking back into the living room and they follow. They follow him up to the front window. Kara, Danny and Tommy step up to the window and look outside the house. At first, they don’t know what they’re looking for. And then, Tommy takes notice of the Wallace house across the street. A light on the ground floor is on.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh my gosh…”

Danny Strode: “What is it?”

Kara Strode: “Wait a minute. It’s the other house. It’s the other house across the street.”

Tommy Doyle: “It is. It’s the Wallace house. Unless somebody just planned on renovating that too, I want to be wrong.”

Drew Mackenzie: “You realize what this means? He might be onto us. He might feel more comfortable playing hide-and-seek at the Wallace house rather than here.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s what I want to be wrong about.”

Kara Strode: “What should we do?”

Drew Mackenzie: “All I know is, I just saw that light go on. If he’s over there right now waiting for us, it’s up to us make the next move. If it’s a trap and he plans on coming over here, he won’t just walk across the street and let us see him. He’ll have to walk down the block and then cross the street…”

-Drew turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “…So, what do you think we should do?”

Tommy Doyle: “You’re asking me?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Yeah. You’ve crossed paths with him before. What would you do?”

-Tommy turns to Drew for a moment, then looks away. He turns back to Drew and momentarily speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “We could wait him out. Or, we could make our next move right now. Either way, we have no way of knowing what he has planned. Whether he’s waiting over there, or on his way here right now.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Right.”

-Tommy looks out the window for a moment, then continues.

Tommy Doyle: “I’d rather not rush any decisions that can get ourselves killed. I say wait him out a little bit. We have all evening.”

Kara Strode: “I agree.”

Danny Strode: “Yeah.”

Drew Mackenzie: “That makes sense.”

-Drew looks out the window for a moment. As he does, the camera focuses on the trick-or-treaters passing by the house. He then speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “But consider this. It’s almost 8:00. There’s an early curfew for trick-to-treating. It’s been that way for the last several years. It will be over at 8:00. Let’s wait for trick-or-treating to end, and then consider checking the other house.”

Tommy Doyle: “You think so?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Sure. We’re not that much safer waiting here, because we don’t know for sure what he as planned. Right?”

Tommy Doyle: “Right…”

Drew Mackenzie: “I suggest waiting him out until trick-or-treating ends, and then check the Wallace house. I’ll check while you three stay here.”

Kara Strode: “What?”

Tommy Doyle: “I suppose we can wait him out until at least trick-or-treating ends. But why check the house immediately after that?”

Drew Mackenzie: “To beat him to the chase. Take him by surprise. Either way, you guys know how to handle the traps upstairs. And I know how to handle myself.”

-Drew takes hold of his rifle.

Tommy Doyle: “I’m sure you do. But why check the house immediately?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Because I got a feeling. That same kind of feeling I get whenever I go hunting. Consider it my own male intuition. I think he wants to be hunted.”

-Tommy looks over at the Wallace house, then turns back to Drew.

Tommy Doyle: “If I didn’t know better, you’re already over there In your mind, aren’t you?”

-Drew looks out the window with a determined fashion.

Drew Mackenzie: “You could say that.”

-Tommy turns to Drew, then over to Kara and Danny. He then looks out the window with Drew.

Tommy Doyle: “Well, I think I see where you’re going with this. You’re kind of right. We could wait him out, but do we have to when we could beat him to the chase? And by now, we do know how to handle the traps upstairs. You showed us. Either way, you got him or we do.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Exactly.”

Tommy Doyle: “Okay, let’s wait until we stop seeing trick-or-treaters. It won’t be too long. And then, we’ll make the next move.”

Drew Mackenzie: “And we’ll see what happens. But we should be smart about this. We better lock the back door. We don’t want to make this easy for him.”

Tommy Doyle: “Of course not.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’ll go check on that right now.”

-As Drew starts walking over to the dining room, Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Are you sure about this?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think so. We could wait him out, but we have to do something.”

Kara Strode: “All right…”

Tommy Doyle: “Don’t worry. He’s tough. He knows how to handle himself.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #7  
Old 06-27-2012, 05:41 PM
Helloween - Part 6

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Kara Strode: “But what if it is a trap? What if he’s not here when we need him?”

Tommy Doyle: “That shouldn’t be a problem. We planned this out last night, remember?”

Kara Strode: “But what if it doesn’t work? We don’t know if it will yet. You said so last night.”

Tommy Doyle: “Sure. But there’s only one way to find out. By trying. If not, we can still rely on the traps.”

Kara Strode: “Right…”

Tommy Doyle: “Listen, don’t worry. It’s your nerves. You’re scared. Whatever happens, we have a game plan. We’re ready.”

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the mid-evening. It is a few minutes past 8:00 and all trick-or-treaters have returned home. The front door to the Doyle house opens and Drew steps out. The understated “Halloween” theme begins playing. He shuts the door behind him and first looks around. He then steps out from beneath the balcony.

-Back inside, Tommy locks the door (Click! Chi-ching!) and walks over to the front window. He watches with Kara and Danny as Drew walks across the front yard and up to the curb. The camera focuses on Tommy as he watches Drew walk further away from the Doyle house and closer to the Wallace house. It appears that the reality of their situation is finally sinking in.

Kara Strode: “You’re worried about him, aren’t you?”

Tommy Doyle: “You could say that.”

-Back outside, Drew stops at the curb. He looks down both ends of the block to check for any patrolling police cars. Seeing nobody, he steps onto the street and start making his way across it. He makes it across the street and steps up to the next curb. He steps onto the front lawn and walks up to the Wallace. He stops a few feet from the porch and looks all up way at the house. He then steps aside from the porch and instead walks over to the side.

-Back across the street, cut to a point of view of a mysterious figure. Heavy breathing is heard. He/she watches as Drew steps past the front porch and along the side of the Wallace house. He/she watches as he disappears around the back. He/she then steps back and looks at the Doyle house.

-Back across the street, Drew continues up the side of the Wallace house. He eventually walks around to the right and discovers Michael’s entry into the house. He found his way in through one of the back doors. One of the window panes is shattered and the door is hanging open. As he steps closer, a spatter of blood is evident on the door. For a moment, Drew faces the darkness beyond the open door. He then starts stepping forward and fully swings the door open.

-Back across the street, cut to the point of view of the mysterious figure as he/she walks along the side of the Doyle house. As before, heavy breathing is heard. He/she stops at the gate between the house and garage, and swings it open as silently as possible. He/she walks past the open gate and further up the house.

-The mysterious figure walks around to the back and finds him/herself at the back kitchen door. He/she stops in front of it and looks in through the window. He/she then looks down at the doorknob and a right hand reaches forward to open it. A right hand with a bloody cut.

-The hand takes hold of the doorknob and begins turning it. And it does not turn all the way. It is locked. The hand lets go of the knob and pulls back. He/she looks back up through the window. And then, his/her hand suddenly reaches forward and punches through the window (Smash! Shatter!).

-Back in the living room, Kara and Danny both tense up. Tommy turns to them.

Tommy Doyle: “They’re here. Get in the back and go upstairs.”

Kara Strode: “What you mean, they?”

Danny Strode: “Yeah, are you talking about the cult?”

Tommy Doyle: “No. It’s nothing. I meant to say Michael. Come on, hurry up.”

Kara Strode: “All right…”

-Kara turns to Danny.

Kara Strode: “…Danny, come on.”

Tommy Doyle: “I’ll be right there. I know exactly what I’m doing. When you get to the bedroom, wait for me before closing the door.”

-As Kara starts leading Danny over to the den, she looks back at Tommy in a questionable manner. Is there something he isn’t telling? Kara and Danny disappear into the den, while Tommy starts walking over to the dining room.

-Back outside, the mysterious figure unlocks the back door (Click! Chi-ching!). He/she pulls his/her bloody hand back and turns the doorknob.

-Back inside, the camera focuses on the other side of the door. The doorknob is seen turning. The camera then begins panning up. It pans up to the ceiling to reveal a string attached to the door. Attached to the other end of the string is a bell hooked up to the wall.

-Back outside, the mysterious figure starts pulling the door open. Back inside, the string starts pulling back as the door begins swinging open. Back outside, the hand pulls the door open quietly as possible. And back inside, the string is pulled all the way back and the bell starts ringing (Ri-i-i-i-ing!...).

-Tommy steps around to the dining room wall and stops. There’s the bell officially signaling their invited guest. Or guests. The question is, how many have accepted invitations?

-Back outside, the mysterious figure looks up towards the top of the doorway. He/she then lets go of the door and starts walking in. He/she passes through the doorway and then looks over to the bell on the wall.

-Back in the dining room, Tommy braces himself. He then shrugs and quickly looks around the entrance. He ducks back and sighs of relief.

Tommy Doyle: “Only one.”

-Tommy starts walking back over to the living room.

-Back in the kitchen, the mysterious figure turns his/her attention back to the dining room and starts stepping forward. As he/she does, the understated “Halloween” theme tones down and the suspenseful version takes over. The mysterious figure makes his/her way through the kitchen. He/she passes the dining room entrance and begins stepping around for the living room entrance.

-Cut to the living room. And cut to the dining room entrance. A tall figure in blue overalls and a white Halloween mask steps out of the dining room and into the living room. Now in full view, Michael looks around the living room. He sees nobody. He then turns his Halloween-masked head over to the entrance leading to the den. Within the den is Tommy grasping a sledgehammer. Seeing a glimpse of Michael, he steps back out of sight. He steps back towards the stairs.

-Michael stands his ground in the living room breathing heavily. With his dead-like eyes directed towards the den, he starts stepping forward. He steps up to the entrance. He passes through it and finds himself in the den.

-Upstairs on the second floor is Tommy. He peeks around the railing and sees Michael. Michael looks around the den. He looks over to the closet to his right, then over to the bathroom door to the far left. As he looks away from the bathroom door and over to the stairs, Tommy ducks his head back out of sight. Michael looks all around the den. He then directs his attention to the closet. Tommy, watching his every move, mutters to himself.

Tommy Doyle: “That’s right, check out the closet first…”

-Michael walks right up to the closet door and opens it. Nobody is there. He leaves the door open and walks over to the bathroom door.

Tommy Doyle: “Now, over to the bathroom…”

-Michael walks right over to the bathroom door. He opens it and looks inside. Nobody is there.

Tommy Doyle: “Now, over to the stairs…”

-Michael steps back from the bathroom and looks over to the stairs. He stands his ground and breathes heavily. He then starts stepping forward. As soon as he does, Tommy starts stepping back. Michael walks up to the stairs. He stops in front of it and looks up to the second floor. He climbs up the first step. He climbs up the second step and the remainder of the stairs. He climbs up from the top step to the second floor.

-Michael steps around and looks around the first hallway. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down and dead silence takes over. To his right, beyond the stairs, is the closed door to the first bedroom. To his left, in the hallway turning back, is the closed door to the second bedroom. At the end of the hallway is another hallway turning to the left. Along the second hallway is the closed bathroom door.

-Michael first turns to the bedroom to his right. He takes hold of the doorknob and begins turning it. He turns the doorknob and begins swinging the door open. He swings the door all the way open. And suddenly, a sledgehammer hooked up to the ceiling swings down (Swish!) and strikes him in the chest (Thwonk!). Michael takes the hit and stumbles back. He stumbles back into the door to the next bedroom (Thud!).

-Michael, grasping his chest, steps away from the door and back over to the first bedroom. He looks inside and sees nobody at first. He steps past the sledgehammer hanging from the ceiling and walks in. He walks in and looks around. The room is empty. All that is present is the closet built into the wall.

-Michael stands his ground and breathes heavily. He then starts stepping forward. He walks right over to the closet, takes hold of the binding doors, and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there.

-Michael steps back out of the first bedroom and over to the second one. He takes hold of the doorknob, turns it, and pulls the door open. And just as before, a sledgehammer is released from ceiling. It swings over (Swish!) and strikes him in the chest (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back and into the first sledgehammer in the other bedroom (Thwonk!).

-Michael grasps his chest and back. He then steps away from the first bedroom and back over to the second one. He steps past the sledgehammer hanging from the ceiling and looks inside. All that is present is a closet and another door. He walks right over to the closet. He takes hold of the binding doors and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there. Michael steps back from the closet and looks over to the other door. He also looks up at the ceiling. There is no other sledgehammer waiting to surprise him in that room.

-Michael steps out of the second bedroom. He walks out through the same way he came in. He finds himself back in the first hallway and starts walking up it. He walks down the hallway and past the railing to his left. He stops at the end of it and looks down the hallway turning to his left. He then looks over at the bathroom door along the second hallway. Finally, he looks over to the hallway leading to the right. Where is he going to look first?

-Michael steps into the hallway to his right. As he discovers, there are bedroom doors to the left and right. He already knows where the one to his right leads. Where does the one to the left lead? Michael takes hold of the doorknob and turns it. He starts pulling the door open.

-Michael then stops and remembers the surprises the first two bedrooms left him. He continues pulling the door open and steps aside. And suddenly swinging through the doorway is a sledgehammer (Swish!). It strikes the tension of the air and swings back and forth (Swish! Swish!). He reaches over and it stops it (Clench!).

-Michael steps past the sledgehammer hanging from the ceiling and walks into the bedroom. Present inside is a closet, as well as doors to the balcony. He looks over to the closet, then over to the balcony. And he heads for the closet first. He walks right up to the closet, takes hold of the binding doors, and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there.

-Back outside on the balcony, both doors open. Michael steps out and walks over to the railing. He stops and looks around. Nobody is there.

-Michael steps out of the third bedroom and back into the second hallway. He walks up to the bathroom door and immediately pulls it open. He quickly steps back and watches as another sledgehammer swings into the doorway (Swish!). He reaches over and stops it (Clench!). He then steps up to the doorway and looks inside. Nobody is there. However, there is another door on the other side. And hooked up to the ceiling above it is another sledgehammer.

-Michael steps away from the bathroom and continues up the hallway. He turns the corner and starts making his way down the hallway leading to the right. He passes the first window to his left. He passes the second window to his left. He reaches the end of the third hallway and stops. In front of him is the closed door to the fourth bedroom. And to his right is another hallway leading to a fifth bedroom.

-Michael steps right up to the fourth bedroom and pulls the door open. He remains where he’s standing and catches the sledgehammer swinging from the ceiling (Clench!). He then takes hold of the sledgehammer and tears it from the ceiling (Smash! Crunch! Cha-ching!). He steps into the bedroom and tosses the sledgehammer aside (Cha-ching!). Michael then looks around. All that is present is a closet. He walks right over to it. He takes hold of its binding doors and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there.

-Michael steps out of the fourth bedroom and back into the fourth hallway. He starts making his way down it. He passes the other door to the bathroom to his right. He already knows what’s waiting for him inside. He walks to the end of the hallway and stops. In front of him is the closed door to the fifth and final bedroom. And to his left is the last hallway leading to a dead end.

-Michael turns his Halloween-masked head to the darkness waiting for him at the end of the hallway. He misses the darkness. He’s tired of playing hide-and-seek. He, or Thorn, could not be more ready to finish off the Strode’s once and for all, and wait to start all over again with a new generation.

-Michael turns his Halloween-masked head back to the fifth bedroom. He reaches forward and takes hold of the doorknob. He turns the doorknob and start pulling the door open. As he does, he steps aside. And as he proceeds to swing the door completely open, one last sledgehammer is released from the ceiling. It swings over into the doorway (Swish!) and Michael reaches over to catch it (Clench!).

-Michael tears the sledgehammer from the ceiling (Smash! Cha-ching! Crunch!). He steps into the bedroom and tosses the sledgehammer aside (Cha-ching!). He then looks around and sees Kara, Danny and Tommy in the back. He stands his ground and faces them. He breathes heavily and stares them down with his dead-like eyes. Finally, he begins stepping forward. And the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins picking up again. Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Whatever you’re going to do, do it now…”

Tommy Doyle: “Hold on…”

-Tommy, grasping the sledgehammer in his left hand, braces himself. And in his right is a chain hanging from the ceiling. Michael continues stepping forward.

Kara Strode: “Hurry up…”

Tommy Doyle: “Wait for it…”

-Michael steps closer towards them and into the middle of the bedroom. Tommy then shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “Now!”

-Tommy pulls on the chain hanging from the ceiling (Ching!). It pulls back and releases a chained netting from the middle of the ceiling (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!...). It falls onto Michael and nearly causes him to collapse forward (…Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). He picks himself back up and faces them.

-With the sledgehammer in his hands, Tommy approaches Michael. Michael reaches up with both arms, struggling to pull the netting off of him (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing! Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). Before he can, Tommy steps right up to him and strikes him with the sledgehammer (Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!). Michael takes it and stumbles back. Tommy strikes Michael once more (Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!) and continues his assault (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-i-ing!).

-Michael takes every hit and continues stumbling back. Tommy continues assaulting him (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!), until Michael collapses onto his knees (Thud! Thud! Cha-chi-i-ing!). Tommy steps back and then continues the assault (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!).

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #8  
Old 06-27-2012, 05:49 PM
Helloween - Part 7

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-The others watch as Tommy assaults Michael with one blow of the sledgehammer followed by another (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!). For once in a long time, Michael is unable to defend himself. Tommy continues assaulting Michael until he’s almost out of breath (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwo-o-onk! Cha-chi-i-ing!). He assaults Michael a few more times (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!).

-On the next blow (Thwo-o-onk! Cha-chi-i-ing!), Tommy is out of it. And so is Michael. He cannot take anymore abuse. He falls over to his side and onto his back (Thud! Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). The suspenseful “Halloween” theme stops cold. Tommy steps back and catches his breath. He then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “It worked. I just did everything I possibly could to keep him down.”

Kara Strode: “You certainly did. Now, tell me. What did you mean by ‘them’? Do you know for a fact that they are actually here?”

Danny Strode: “Yeah, are they?”

-Tommy turns to Kara and Danny, then looks over to the door. Upon seeing Drew still away, and Michael still down, he shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “I have no time to explain right now. We have to finish this now. Come on…”

-Back across the street, the front door to the Wallace house opens. Drew walks out onto the front porch. Upon falling into Michael’s trap, he shuts the door and starts running for the Doyle house. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins picking up.

-Back in the Doyle house, the others stand around Michael’s unconscious body. Tommy opens the occult book and pulls out a slip of paper with a spell written on it. He looks down at the slip of paper, then over to the others. He then begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn. Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Back outside, Drew runs across the street and up to the Doyle house.

-Back inside, Tommy continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment. Don’t listen to the torment…”

-Back outside, Drew runs up to the front door. Upon discovering it locked, he runs off the porch and around to the side of the house.

-Back inside, Tommy continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

-Back downstairs in the kitchen, Drew discovers the back door hanging open. He runs right in.

-Back upstairs, Tommy continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo…”

-Suddenly, Michael sits up in a mechanical manner and turns his Halloween-masked head to Tommy. Kara and Danny tense up and step back. Tommy, however, bravely faces the evil that is Thorn. He steps back and continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-With the chained netting still on him, Michael reaches down to the floor and starts picking himself up.

Tommy Doyle: “…Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

-Michael stands back up. He then reaches up and to pull the chained netting off of him.

Tommy Doyle: “…Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer…”

-Michael pulls the chained netting off his head and drops it (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). He faces them and begins stepping forward. The others start stepping back towards the doorway.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow yourself to become consumed by it. And continue listening to Wunjo…”

-Tommy and the others step back into the hallway. Michael steps after them.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul. And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn…”

-Tommy and the others step further out into the fourth hallway. Michael steps out of the bedroom and into the hallway. And suddenly, Drew runs in from next hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and…”

-Drew, seeing an opportunity, aims the rifle forward and fires (Bang!). Michael takes the shot in the chest and stumbles back into the last hallway. Tommy and the others are startled. Tommy also sighs of frustration. Until Drew interrupted, he had Michael where he wanted him.

Tommy Doyle: “Dammit.”

-Drew walks right over to the last hallway and steps past the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “Stay back!”

-Drew steps around into the last hallway and sees Michael waiting for him. He aims the rifle at him and fires (Bang!). Michael takes the shot and stumbles back. Drew steps after Michael and fires again (Bang!). Michael stumbles back further into the hallway. Drew continues stepping forward and firing the rifle at Michael (Bang! Bang! Bang!). Michael continues taking the shots and stumbling back. Drew steps forward and fires the rifle at Michael once more (Bang!). Michael is sent stumbling back into the wall (Thud!).

-Drew, realizing he’s shot the last bullet in the clip, stands his ground and bravely keeps the rifle aimed at Michael. Michael lays back against the wall and faces Drew. He also grasps the wounds in his chest. He then starts collapsing to the floor. His upper torso slides down the wall and his legs slide out in front of him. His Halloween-masked head also sags over. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down.

-Drew lowers the rifle and looks on at Michael’s body. He then starts stepping back. With his eyes still on Michael, he steps back into the next hallway. He then turns to the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s all right. I got him. He’s dead.”

-Tommy faces Drew and turns to him in a suspicious manner.

Tommy Doyle: “Is he?”

-Drew turns to Tommy questionably. Before he can fully react, Michael suddenly picks his head back up and looks over at Drew. Drew turns to the others and shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie “Get back! Get back now! Go downstairs!”

-Tommy turns to Drew in the same questionable manner as before, then starts walking away. He turns to Kara and Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “Come on.”

-Tommy and others start walking back into the next hallway. As they do, Tommy finally tells them what they wanted to hear.

Tommy Doyle: “What I didn’t have time to tell you before is that I don’t think we can trust Drew. I think he might be one of them.”

Kara Strode: “You’re kidding…”

-Drew stays where he is the corner of the fourth and fifth hallway and stands his ground. He watches as Michael reaches down and gets to his knees. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins picking up again. As Michael begins getting back up, Drew empties the rifle (Ching!) and puts in a new clip (Cha-ching!).

-Michael stands all the way back up and faces Drew. Drew, raising the rifle, faces Michael. Michael begins stepping forward. Drew stands his ground and keeps the rifle aimed towards rifle. He then fires at him (Bang!). Michael stops and ducks aside. He then continues stepping forward.

-Drew fires the rifle at Michael again (Bang!). Michael stops and ducks aside again. He then continues stepping forward and Drew fires once more (Bang!). Michael stops and ducks aside once more. As before, he continues stepping forward.

-Drew watches as Michael continues stepping forward. He waits for it and then fires at Michael (Bang!). This time, Michael is hit. He takes the shot and stumbles back. Drew shrugs and continues firing at him (Bang! Bang! Bang!). Michael, caught in the line of fire, stumbles all the way back to the wall (Thud!).

-Michael grasps the wounds in his chest, then the wall behind him. He looks back up and faces Drew. Drew faces Michael. Michael then lets go of the wall and starts stepping forward. Drew starts stepping back into the fourth hallway. He steps back into the corner and looks in the hallway to see the others still upstairs. He shrugs and runs over to them.

-Michael continues stepping forward. He steps up to the end of the fifth hallway. He turns the corner and starts making his way down. And instead of going the long way around, he walks right over to the second door to the bathroom.

-Michael pulls the door open and walks right in. Waiting for him on the other side of the door is a sledgehammer. It starts swinging down from the ceiling (Swish!). Unexpectedly, the gravitational force of the sledgehammer is no match for the anger and hatred brewing within Michael. As Michael walks in, the sledgehammer bounces off his chest (Thwonk!). Michael’s force also tears it from the ceiling (Smash! Crunch!) and to the floor (Cha-ching!).

-Back in the third hallway, Drew runs to the other end and catches up with the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “What the hell are you guys still doing up here? I told you to go downstairs.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s exactly what you want us to do, isn’t it?”

-Drew empties his rifle (Ching!).

Drew Mackenzie: “What’s that supposed mean?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think you know exactly what that means. They’re down there waiting for us, aren’t they?”

-Drew puts a new clip into his rifle (Cha-ching!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Who? What are you talking about?”

-Drew turns to Tommy very oddly, then looks over to the opposite end of the third hallway to see if Michael is coming. Unexpectedly, Michael steps out into the second hallway from other doorway to the bathroom. Drew shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “Watch out!”

-Michael steps around in the second hallway and wastes no time. He starts stepping towards Drew. Drew aims the rifle at Michael and fires (Bang!). Michael takes the shot to the chest and stumbles back. Drew steps forward and fires at Michael again (Bang!). Michael stumbles back towards the end of the second hallway.

-Drew steps forward and fires at Michael once more (Bang!). Michael stumbles out of the second hallway and disappears into the third bedroom. Drew walks right over to the open doorway of the third bedroom and sees Michael waiting for him. He aims the rifle at Michael and fires once again (Bang!). Michael takes the shot and stumbles back. Drew stands his ground and fires at him one more time (Bang!). Michael stumbles back further into the bedroom. Drew bravely steps forward and raises his rifle to finish the job.

-Back outside, the camera follows Michael from above the balcony as he stumbles outside out of the house and over to the railing (Bang! Bang! Thud!). He collapses over the railing, falls from the balcony and lands on the front lawn (Thud!). Michael, laying on his back, is motionless. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down. Drew runs out to the balcony and takes a look for himself. Michael is down. For now. He looks down at Michael for a moment, then calls for the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “Hey, I got him! Come on out and take a look!”

-Upon seeing none of the others stepping into the third bedroom, he calls for them again.

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s okay! It’s safe! He’s outside of the house! He’s down for the count!”

-Upon seeing the others still staying inside, Drew sighs and starts walking back into the third bedroom. He steps out of the third bedroom and into the second hallway where the others are waiting.

Drew Mackenzie: “What the hell is the matter with all of you? I shot him to Hell and back, and you still think I’m someone else?”

-Tommy turns to Kara and Danny, then back to Drew. Neither of them say a word.

Drew Mackenzie: “Who? Who on earth do you think I really am?...”

-Drew turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “…You know me. I was the only person who gave a damn about you after that god awful Halloween. Everyone else mocked you for years, but did I? No. I was there for you. After Lindsey Wallace moved away, I was your only friend. How dare you accuse me of being somebody I’m not. I don’t know what’s going on here, but you owe me an explanation.”

Tommy Doyle: “Actually, you owe us the explanation.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Do I?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Fine. Tell me what it is. Let’s get this over with.”

Tommy Doyle: “All right. Why didn’t you lock the back door like you said you would?”

Drew Mackenzie: “What?”

Tommy Doyle: “You heard me. Why didn’t you lock the back door?”

Drew Mackenzie: “I thought I did.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, it wasn’t. I went to check on it, because I’ll admit, you really got me riled up. Like you suggested, maybe we can beat Michael to the chase. Only quicker. Before you left the house, I checked on the back door. I thought maybe we were better off keeping it unlocked and making Michael think he was welcome. Well, we didn’t have to worry about that, did we? Because when I went back there, it was still unlocked. We saw you go back to the kitchen to lock the door and then come back. What were you really doing if you didn’t plan on unlocking it? Huh?”

-Drew turns to Tommy for a moment, then over to Kara and Danny. He turns back to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “I don’t know what to tell you. I guess I screwed up. I went back there with the intention to lock the door. I may have looked outside in the backyard to see if he was out there, and may have walked away forgetting to lock it. I screwed up. I’m only human.”

-Tommy looks on at Drew without saying a word.

Drew Mackenzie: “What does it matter anyway? Either way, you’re still okay. All of you are.”

-Tommy continues looking on at Drew without saying a word.

Drew Mackenzie: “I made a mistake. It could have been a disastrous one, but it wasn’t. We all came out of it okay. He didn’t. And if we don’t check up on him right now, he might get away. I must have shot three clips into him, and he kept on coming.”

-Tommy continues looking on at Drew without saying a word. Drew turns to Kara and Danny, and they also say nothing. He turns back to Tommy and sighs. He then takes hold of the rifle in his hands. He looks down at it for a moment, and then empties it (Ching!). As he proceeds to put in a new clip (Cha-ching!), Kara and Danny turn to Tommy and tense up. Drew finishes loading the new clip into the rifle (Ching!). And he unexpectedly hands it to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “Here. Take it if you don’t believe me. I have no intention of hurting any of you.”

-Tommy turns to Drew for a moment. Drew faces Tommy. Tommy then looks down at the rifle being offered to him. And he accepts it. He takes hold of the rifle and looks on at Drew.

Drew Mackenzie: “Well?”

-Tommy, as before, looks on at Drew for a moment without saying a word. And then, he finally speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “All right. Let’s go downstairs and check up on Michael like you say. And let’s see who else is down there waiting for us…or whose not.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Whatever. Fine by me.”

-Tommy takes hold of the rifle and points it at Drew.

Tommy Doyle: “You first.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Whatever you say.”

-Drew steps back and walks over into the first hallway. Tommy and the others follow. They follow him down the hallway and around to the stairs. Step by step, Drew leads them down to the den. Drew steps down to the ground floor, followed by Tommy, Kara and Danny. Tommy turns to the Drew, then looks over to the living room entrance. As far as they can see, they don’t see anybody. Not yet. Tommy then turns to Drew and points the rifle at him.

Tommy Doyle: “You lead the way.”

-Drew rolls his eyes.

Drew Mackenzie: “Honestly…”

-Drew starts walking over to the living room entrance. Tommy and the others begin following him.

Tommy Doyle: “And stay close.”

-Drew steps a foot from the living room entrance and stops. Tommy and the others step up behind him. Tommy looks past Drew and looks around the living room.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #9  
Old 06-27-2012, 06:03 PM
Helloween - Part 8

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh, no…”

-Seeing Tommy distracted, Drew elbows him in the chest (Thwonk!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uuuhh!”

Kara Strode: “Tommy!”

-Tommy drops the rifle (Cha-ching!) and Drew picks it up (Clench!). Drew steps back into the living room and reveals a dozen Druid members dressed in robes and hoods. Not only that, candles have been lit all over the room. Three of the Druid members step into the den and take hold of Kara, Danny and Tommy.

Danny Strode: “Nooo!”

Kara Strode: “Get your hands off my son!”

-As the Druid members assist all three of them out into the living room, Drew walks up to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “Honestly, what it took to get you guys down here. I could have just pointed the rifle at you and ordered you downstairs. But I like you. I have too much respect for you to do that. And it came down to this. What a waste.”

Tommy Doyle: “All this time…”

Drew Mackenzie: “I know, right? My whole family, too. When Michael was born, we knew he was destined to become the next carrier of Thorn. And my family was sent to live here and watch over him.”

Tommy Doyle: “You were never my friend.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Actually, I was. I didn’t have to pretend to like you. You were really sharp. When you became obsessed with learning about Michael Myers, I only had to point you in the right direction. Honestly, I thought you could have been the next leader of the cult. I believed in you that much. Well, that spot’s already been taken, but it was a nice thought.”

Tommy Doyle: “What are you talking about?”

-Two more Druid members begin stepping into the living room. Drew turns to them, then back to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “You’ll see.”

-The two Druid members step out of the dining room, and the first one is revealed be dressed in a black overcoat, a black hat, and black silver-tipped boots. The other one is also dressed in black formal wear, as well as black heels. It is none other than Dr. Terence Wynn, a.k.a. the man in black, and his daughter Melinda Wynn. Yet, it is not Wynn who speaks up next. It is his daughter.

Melinda Wynn: “You didn’t harm Michael, did you?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Hardly.”

-Drew heads over to the front window.

Drew Mackenzie: “He should be right outside.”

-Drew steps up to the window and looks outside to see nobody laying on the front lawn.

Drew Mackenzie: “Better yet, he isn’t. He’s out there somewhere. He’s okay. He’ll be back.”

Melinda Wynn: “Very good.”

-As Drew walks away from the window, Wynn sighs.

Dr. Wynn: “The trigger-happy fool. He better not have angered Thorn.”

Melinda Wynn: “Relax. You know better than anyone that Thorn is no match today’s primitive weapons.”

Dr. Wynn: “Maybe so. But Thorn’s tolerance of our direction is wearing thin. He could have handled Michael better.”

Melinda Wynn: “Don’t you worry about that. I’m in control of the cult now, and I will accept responsibility. If he gets carried away again, I will make sure he suffers the consequences.”

Dr. Wynn: “I’m sure you will.”

Melinda Wynn: “And remember. It is my direction now, and not ours.”

Dr. Wynn: “Indeed. Very true, my dear.”

-Both of them turn their attention Kara, Danny and Tommy and walk over to them. Wynn turns to Tommy in particular.

Dr. Wynn: “It’s been a long time, Tommy. Five years ago, you and my dear friend Loomis interfered with our plans. All in order to save…”

-Wynn turns to Kara and Danny in a cold manner.

Dr. Wynn: “…Them…”

-Wynn turns back to Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “…Well, let me assure you that your attempts were in vain. There was nothing you could have done to stop us then. I had my own agenda that interfered as well. And as a result, I rightfully am no longer in charge of the cult. My daughter, Melinda, now is.”

-Tommy turns to Wynn, then over to Melinda.

Tommy Doyle: “You’re insane. Both of you are. You belong locked up in Smith’s Grove, not running your own cult.”

-Both of them turn to Tommy for a moment. Melinda then has a little laugh, while Wynn shrugs.

Dr. Wynn: “Why, those were some of the last words spoken by Loomis before he died. God bless his soul.”

Tommy Doyle: “What happened to Loomis? He supposedly suffered another stroke, but I doubt that’s what really happened.”

Dr. Wynn: “As matter of fact, he did suffer another stroke.”

Tommy Doyle: “How? It wasn’t Michael, was it?”

Dr. Wynn: “No, it certainly was not Michael. I wouldn’t dare do that to someone as loyal as Loomis was to me over the years. It was I. I was under the false belief that Loomis was destined to become the next leader of the cult. After all the trouble he had caused Thorn, his devotion was very evident in my eyes. I believed in it so much, that I defied Thorn and overlooked my own daughter…”

-Wynn turns to Melinda.

Dr. Wynn: “…Well, it has been five years, but this is your reward.”

Melinda Wynn: “Yes, it is…”

-Melinda turns to Tommy.

Melinda Wynn: “…It’s nice to finally meet you. As I understand, you have studied Thorn as well.”

Tommy Doyle: “Only to stop it. While I believe that it exists, I also think it’s a load of bullshit.”

-Melinda looks on at Tommy, then turns to Kara and Danny. She turns to Kara in particular and in a cold manner. She then turns back to Tommy and continues.

Melinda Wynn: “You may feel that way now, but you might feel differently later.”

Tommy Doyle: “What’s that supposed to mean?”

Melinda Wynn: “It’s not too late. You don’t have to suffer the same fate as them. You can join us…”

-Melinda steps closer up to Tommy and turns to him in a more intimate manner.

Melinda Wynn: “…More importantly, you can join me. We can work together. I believe in you, Tommy.”

Dr. Wynn: “And so do I…”

-Melinda steps back beside Wynn, and he continues.

Dr. Wynn: “…For years, I was told of your growing devotion to Thorn…”

-Wynn turns to Drew.

Dr. Wynn: “…From Drew…”

-Wynn turns back to Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “…And also from Mrs. Blankenship. Bless her soul. She died of natural causes a year ago. Anyway, I mistakenly overlooked your investment into Thorn for a long time. And as a result, Loomis was not the only one to interfere with our plans five years ago. So did you.”

Melinda Wynn: “So, it couldn’t be more fitting to offer you such a privileged position tonight. Before we go forward with my plans…”

-Melinda turns to Tommy in another intimate manner.

Melinda Wynn: “…Or, our plans.”

-Wynn turns to his daughter, then turns to back to Tommy. He steps closer up to Tommy and quietly speaks up.

Dr. Wynn: “You should consider this. After all your research, this will be your reward. Not only that, Melinda has been keeping a close eye on you. She adores you. Both of us believe that you will be a valuable asset to the cult.”

-Kara, overhearing Wynn, looks on in disbelief.

Kara Strode: “No. No...”

-Tommy looks on at Wynn for a moment. He then finally speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “You still didn’t answer my question. What happened to Loomis?”

Dr. Wynn: “I still haven’t, have I? Why, you have every right to know. I was under the false belief that Loomis was destined to be my successor. And when I offered him the privileged position to take over as the new leader of the cult and new chief administrator of Smith’s Grove, it was too much for him to bear. He suffered another stroke and died. Believe me, I consider it one of my gravest mistakes in my leadership. As much as he challenged Thorn, I would never have wished another stroke on him. Never. I was well aware of his debilitating health and believed watching over Thorn would make him stronger again. I was wrong.”

Tommy Doyle: “You’re a monster.”

Dr. Wynn: “Again, words spoken by Loomis before he died. You remind me so much of him. But what does it mean? Would you prefer to suffer a similar fate as him? Or would you rather learn from his fate and watch over Thorn?”

Melinda Wynn: “It’s your choice. Don’t take too long to make your decision…”

-Melinda turns to Wynn.

Melinda Wynn: “…Besides, Michael still hasn’t shown.”

Dr. Wynn: “Don’t worry, he’s here. He’ll come when he’s ready.”

-As both of them start walking away towards the dining room entrance, Kara speaks up.

Kara Strode: “What about Stephen Lloyd?”

-They completely ignore Kara and continue walking away.

Kara Strode: “I have the right to know. Tell me, what about Stephen Lloyd? He hasn’t been harmed yet, has he?”

-They continue walking away and Kara sighs of frustration.

Kara Strode: “For Christ’s sakes, tell me. Please. What about Stephen Lloyd? Is he okay?”

-Tommy watches as they begin stepping into the dining room. He then asks the question for Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “Before I make my decision…”

-Wynn and Melinda stop in their tracks.

Tommy Doyle: “…I wish to know of Stephen Lloyd’s fate. Has he been harmed yet? If I choose to watch over Thorn, will I have the privilege of witnessing his fate with you?”

-Wynn and Melinda turn around and face Tommy. They turn to each other, and then Melinda walks back over to them. She first turns to Tommy, then over to Kara in a cold manner. Finally, she turns back to Tommy and speaks up.

Melinda Wynn: “No. Stephen Lloyd has not been harmed yet. We kept the promise we made in our note to you this morning. He will be sacrificed tonight as planned…”

-Melinda turns to Kara and Danny in a cold manner.

Melinda Wynn: “…Along with both you…”

-Melinda turns back to Tommy.

Melinda Wynn: “…Whether you join them or not is your decision.”

-Melinda steps closer up to Tommy and kisses him on the lips. Kara looks on in disbelief, and so does Danny.

Kara Strode: “No…”

Danny Strode: “No way…”

-Melinda steps back and shrugs.

Melinda Wynn: “I’ve waited a long time to do that. I really hope you make the right decision.”

-Melinda turns back to Kara in a cold manner and then walks away. She walks back over her father and both of them disappear into the dining room. Once inside, she turns to her father.

Melinda Wynn: “All right, everything is set, but Michael is still out there. I’m worried, what if he doesn’t come?”

Dr. Wynn: “He was here, so he will come back when he’s ready.”

Melinda Wynn: “I wanted to avoid saying this, but what if Thorn doesn’t give me the benefit of a doubt, because I’m your daughter? Because I’m another Wynn?”

Dr. Wynn: “You’re overreacting. Thorn recognizes that you are a different leader than I am, and most likely a better leader than I was. You’re just nervous. After all, this is your first Samhain as cult leader. Thorn will show. We have all evening.”

Melinda Wynn: “I guess so…”

-Wynn looks on for a moment, then looks over at Drew talking amongst the other Druid members. He turns back to Melinda.

Dr. Wynn: “But perhaps it might be a good idea to send someone out to inform Thorn that it’s safe to come back in. That we’ve all arrived. If Thorn can’t sense our presence, perhaps someone should go outside and check up on Thorn.”

Melinda Wynn: “That’s a good idea. Who should I send?”

Dr. Wynn: “Perhaps the trigger-happy fool who sent him back outside in the first place.”

-Melinda looks over at Drew in the living room, then turns back to her father.

Melinda Wynn: “I agree. If Thorn has been shaken up, he needs to tell Thorn that it’s safe to come back in.”

-Melinda steps out of the dining room and into the living room. She walks over to Drew and speaks up.

Melinda Wynn: “Drew, can I see you for a moment?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Sure.”

-Melinda and Drew both step aside.

Melinda Wynn: “I’m worried that Thorn is uncertain about coming back in. So, I want you to go outside and inform Michael that we have things under control.”

-Drew looks out the front window, then turns back to Melinda.

Drew Mackenzie: “Are you sure that’s necessary?”

Melinda Wynn: “No, but I want you to go out anyway. Considering you shot him so many times, it might be a good idea to check up on him.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Hey, I only shot him to put on a show for the others.”

Melinda Wynn: “I understand that. But we heard you from down here. I know that you like Tommy, but you may have gotten carried away to make him believe you.”

-Drew sighs.

Drew Mackenzie: “You’re right. I may have tried too hard. I may have been too emotionally involved.”

Melinda Wynn: “Being emotionally involved at all with the victims is too emotionally involved period. We still don’t know if he’ll join us. And you may have angered Thorn in the process.”

Drew Mackenzie: “You’re right about that. I’ll go outside and try to get back on Thorn’s good side…”

-Drew hands Melinda his rifle.

Drew Mackenzie: “…Here, I won’t need this.”

-Melinda accepts the rifle.

Melinda Wynn: “Of course not.”

-Drew walks over to the front door. He opens it and looks outside first. He then steps out and shuts the door behind him. As he steps out from beneath the balcony, the understated “Halloween” theme begins playing. Drew steps out onto the front lawn. The grass is notably dead and has not been taken care of. However, there is a flatter spot where Michael obviously landed. Drew steps up to it and spots a spatter of blood. He follows the blood trail and finds himself walking up to the side of the house.

-Drew finds himself stepping up to the gate between the house and garage. He opens it and steps into the backyard. He shuts the gate behind him and makes his way into the backyard. As he does, he speaks up quietly as possible to not arouse attention from neighbors.

Drew Mackenzie: “Michael? Michael!”

-Drew steps further into the backyard.

Drew Mackenzie: “Michael, it’s okay! We have things under control!”

-Cut to the point of view of a mysterious figure stepping out of the darkness of the backyard. Breathing heavily, he/she approaches Drew.

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m sorry I shot you! I was only trying to fool Tommy!”

-Cut to the point of view of the mysterious figure as he/she closely approaches Drew.

Drew Mackenzie: “Hey, you know I’m on your side! If I got carried away, I apologize! Come on, let’s go back inside and prepare for the final ceremony!”

-Cut to the point of view of the mysterious figure as he/she steps up behind Drew. As he/she does, both of his/her arms appear and raise up toward Drew. Drew then turns around and is startled.

Drew Mackenzie: “There you are! Whew!...”

-The mysterious figure, or obviously Michael, stops in his tracks and keeps his arms raised toward Drew.

Drew Mackenzie: “…You scared me! I looked over there a second ago and didn’t see a thing. You’re not mad at me, are you?”

-Michael remains off-camera and faces Drew. Breathing heavily, he looks on at him for a moment. Finally, he lowers his arms and steps back. Drew sighs of relief.

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m glad you’re not. Come on, let’s go back inside and finish this. I know you want to as badly as we do.”

-Drew turns around and starts walking over to the back door. Michael starts following after. As Drew steps up to the back door, Michael closely steps up behind him and raises his arms again. And just as Drew begins opening the back door, both arms take hold of Drew (Clench! Clench!). The understated “Halloween” theme tones down and the suspenseful version takes over.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #10  
Old 06-27-2012, 06:12 PM
Helloween - Part 9

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Drew Mackenzie: “Hey! Argh!”

-Michael, finally in full view, turns Drew around and slams him against the house (Thud!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Hey! Argh! Hey! What are you doing! Argh!”

-With both hands, Michael holds Drew against the house. He breathes heavily and stares him down with his dead-like eyes.

Drew Mackenzie: “Michael! Michael! Stop! You know it wasn’t personal! I’m sorry if I upset you! Please!”

-Michael releases his right hand. Drew watches as Michael pulls out his kitchen knife (Shi-i-i-ing) and swings it back. He tenses up.

Drew Mackenzie: “Michael! Michael! You don’t want to do this! I’m on your side! I didn’t mean to hurt you!”

-Michael swings the knife back (Swish!) and Drew tenses up big time.

Drew Mackenzie: “Michael?”

-Finally, Michael swings the knife forward and stabs Drew in the chest (Shing! Splatter!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs Drew again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Drew Mackenzie: “ARGH!”

-Michael stabs Drew once more (Shing! Splatter!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs Drew once again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Drew Mackenzie: “ARGH!”

-Michael stabs Drew one more time (Shing! Splatter!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs Drew one last time (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Drew Mackenzie: “ARGH!”

-Michael then stabs Drew some more (Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh! ARGH!...”

-Back inside the Doyle house, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme stops cold and Melinda waits anxiously in the dining room.

Melinda Wynn: “Where is he?”

Dr. Wynn: “Perhaps he is still consulting with Michael.”

Melinda Wynn: “Yeah, but he’s been out there for a while.”

Dr. Wynn: “If you’re worried, why don’t you send two more out? And tell them specifically to look for Drew. Just in case they don’t like what they find, tell them to come back in immediately.”

Melinda Wynn: “Oh my gosh, you don’t think that he…”

Dr. Wynn: “You made a point earlier that is very true. Although I am no longer in charge of the cult, Thorn may not have warmed up to your direction yet. If Thorn is still very much upset with me, it may have taken it out on Drew.”

Melinda Wynn: “Oh, I hope not…”

-Cut to the front of the Doyle house moments later. The understated “Halloween” theme begins playing and the front door opens. Two Druid members in robes and hoods step out and shut the door behind them. They step out from beneath the balcony and onto the front lawn. They discover the flatter section of dead grass and start following the blood trail.

-Cut to the backyard. The gate opens and both Druid members step in. They shut the gate behind them and walk along the side of the house. As they step past the house, one of them wanders into the surrounding darkness, while the other immediately discovers Drew’s slain body laying against the back wall. He/she immediately signals the other Druid member. The other Druid member steps over to Drew’s body. They then turn to each other and immediately get back into the house. The understated “Halloween” theme also tones down.

-Moments later, Melinda steps out of the kitchen and back into the dining room. The Druid members have just informed her of Drew’s fate. She turns to her father and shrugs.

Melinda Wynn: “They just checked up on Drew and found him dead! I’m taking action! I have to get through to Michael and tell him that everything is okay.”

-Wynn turns to Melinda, then over to the two Druid members still in the kitchen. He turns to them in an unusual manner and they start stepping forward. Wynn then turns to his daughter.

Dr. Wynn: “Actually, you won’t have to.”

-Melinda turns to her father questionably.

Melinda Wynn: “What do you mean?”

-Suddenly, both Druid members step up behind Melinda and they take hold of her.

Melinda Wynn: “Dad! What are you doing?”

Dr. Wynn: “It’s nothing personal, dear. I’m just picking up where I left off. You’re right, I failed Thorn. And I intend to do everything in my power to finish what I started.”

Melinda Wynn: “How? By defying Thorn again?”

Dr. Wynn: “Not necessarily. I am no longer cult leader, you are. This is merely mutiny.”

-Wynn turns to the two other Druid members.

Dr. Wynn: “Follow me.”

-Wynn steps into the living room and the two Druid members assist Melinda inside. As they do, she cries out to the ten other Druid members.

Melinda Wynn: “Help me! My father is defying Thorn again!”

-The hoods of the ten other Druid members turn to her, then over to her father. And they stay put where they’re standing. As it turns out, they also still believe in his leadership.

Dr. Wynn: “It is time to prepare for the final ceremony…”

Tommy Doyle: “Oh, no…”

-Wynn turns to Melinda.

Dr. Wynn: “…But first, I owe you a lot of credit. You helped me set this all up. You allowed Thorn to begin believing in our direction again. And now, it is time for me to finish what I started so long ago.”

Melinda Wynn: “You mean, my direction! I’m in charge now, not you!...”

-Melinda turns to the other Druid members.

Melinda Wynn: “…Why are you listening to him? Thorn chose me as the new cult leader! My father stepped down! You are all defying Thorn!”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes, but I will accept the sole responsibility when it is over. And you will be free to run the cult as destined.”

Melinda Wynn: “Destined? You didn’t just interfere with Thorn’s destiny, you are also interfering with mine! How long have you had this planned?”

Dr. Wynn: “Long enough…”

-Wynn turns to the other Druid members.

Dr. Wynn: “…Let’s now begin. Bring in the children.”

-Two Druid members step out into the dining room and disappear. Moments later, they are opening the side doors of a white, cargo van in the garage and helping out two boys. Moments later, they lead the two boys around into the living room of the Doyle house. One of them is five years old and is Stephen Lloyd. The other one is in his preteens and is Jeremy Walker. Jeremy, in particular, looks on aimlessly and can barely appear to look anyone in the eye. Kara immediately recognizes which one Stephen must be.

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh, Stephen Lloyd…”

-Melinda, however, recognizes the older boy.

Melinda Wynn: “Jeremy? What is Jeremy doing here?”

Dr. Wynn: “You will see shortly. Now, we just have to wait for Michael.”

-Cut to later on in the mid-evening. The understated “Halloween” theme begins playing. Heavy breathing is heard. Cut to the front of the Doyle house. Nobody is there. Cut to the backyard. Nobody is there. Cut to the front of the Wallace house. Nobody is there. And cut to the backyard where one of the back doors has been broken into. Michael is not there. But he’s out there somewhere. And he’s waiting.

-Back in the Doyle house, the understated “Halloween” theme tones down. Within the living room, Wynn has waited patiently. He turns to his daughter, then over to all the Druid members. He then turns to Kara, Danny and Tommy, as well as Stephen and Jeremy. He turns back to all the Druid members and speaks up.

Dr. Wynn: “We have waited long enough. Michael will show up when he’s ready. We can begin without him.”

Melinda Wynn: “How? How on earth are we supposed to get through the final ceremony without him? They are supposed to die by his hands, not ours.”

Dr. Wynn: “You are correct, my dear. But you see, this will be no ordinary ceremony.”

Melinda Wynn: “It won’t? What do you plan on doing, abandoning all your beliefs?”

Dr. Wynn: “Hardly. I am simply relying on a higher power to reach out to Thorn.”

Melinda Wynn: “What?”

Dr. Wynn: “You’ll see.”

-Wynn reaches into his overcoat and pulls out, none other than, the puzzle box. Melinda instantly recognizes it, and so does Tommy.

Melinda Wynn: “Oh my gosh…”

Tommy Doyle: “That can’t be…”

Kara Strode: “What is it?”

Melinda Wynn: “What are you doing with that?”

-Melinda turns to Wynn, then over to Jeremy. She then turns back to her father.

Melinda Wynn: “Oh my goodness, I think I know what you have in mind. But that’s not the answer. There’s an easier way to get Thorn to cooperate with us. No matter how Thorn feels about you, and how Thorn may feel about me. Give me a chance. I can get through to Thorn.”

Dr. Wynn: “I have given you a chance, and you have done a splendid job so far. You have earned the opportunity to guide Thorn, but you are not ready to guide Michael. At this stage, Michael is much too powerful and he will not listen to you. Michael is still bitter with me, and the only way he will warm up to either of us is by getting him to trust me again.”

Melinda Wynn: “And you think using Pandora’s Box is the answer? You’re in over your head. Think about this first. The moment you open that door…”

Dr. Wynn: “I am aware of what to expect from the darkness beyond Pandora’s Box. And I am prepared to accept it.”

Tommy Doyle: “No, she’s right. The moment you open that door, you can never go back. Neither of us will.”

Kara Strode: “What are you talking about?”

Tommy Doyle: “Trust me, you don’t want to know.”

Dr. Wynn: “Nonsense. I’ve thought about this for a long time…”

-Wynn turns to Melinda.

Dr. Wynn: “…I have given your direction a chance up to this point. And while I believe you are a strong leader, I simply cannot allow you to risk your life by reaching out to Thorn. I tried reaching out to Thorn five years ago and it walked out on me. At this point, Thorn may cause more harm than walk out on us. It may retaliate. It has already retaliated against one of our members.”

Melinda Wynn: “You thought I was overreacting, because I nervous. Well, I think you are. Michael may have killed Drew, simply because he shot at him too many times…”

-Tommy, surprised to hear of Drew’s fate, shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “What?”

Melinda Wynn: “…You were right, he got carried away upstairs. And as a result, he suffered the consequences. That doesn’t mean Michael isn’t willing listen to me. Give me a chance. I’ve waited a long time to guide Thorn. I should have been guiding Thorn since five years ago, and you deprived me of that opportunity. Don’t deprive me of this as well.”

Dr. Wynn: “I’m sorry, I’ve already made my decision. I believe you are capable of guiding Thorn. However, I am unwilling to risk your life over it under these unfortunate circumstances.”

Melinda Wynn: “You can’t do this to me. Not again.”

Dr. Wynn: “I’m sorry.”

Melinda Wynn: “And you can’t open that box. You simply can’t.”

Dr. Wynn: “You’re right. My hands cannot open the box…but Jeremy’s can.”

-Wynn turns his attention to Jeremy and starts getting down to his knees. He gets down to Jeremy’s level and speaks up. Jeremy can barely look Wynn in the eye.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy, look at me…focus on me and listen to what I have to say…”

-Tommy turns to Melinda.

Tommy Doyle: “What’s the matter with him? Why can he open the box?”

Melinda Wynn: “He’s been at Smith’s Grove the last year. He’s disturbed and has emotional issues. He’s painfully shy and he murdered a man his mother was having an affair with. He’s also obsessive-compulsive. One of the only things he can focus his mind on is puzzles.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s not good…”

Melinda Wynn: “I know…”

-Wynn patiently focuses his full attention on Jeremy.

Dr. Wynn: “…Jeremy, listen to me. Listen to what I have to say. I need your help. I need your help to solve a puzzle…”

-Jeremy focuses more of his attention on Wynn and is finally capable of looking him in the eye.

Dr. Wynn: “…That’s right. You like puzzles, don’t you? Well, I got a good one right here…”

-Wynn shows Jeremy the puzzle box.

Dr. Wynn: “…This one is really tricky. I have a feeling only you will be able to solve for it me. Would you like to?”

-Jeremy, finding himself more and more focused on Wynn, speaks up.

Jeremy Walker: “Yes.”

Dr. Wynn: “I’m glad to hear that. Now, before I hand it to you, I want you to listen to me very carefully. What this puzzle opens is a door to a secret world beyond your imagination. And if you don’t open it correctly, you might not get to see it. None of us will get to see it. What I am asking of you is to open a back door into this secret world. A back door that can safely lead us inside it. Do you think you can find that back door for me?”

-Jeremy focuses more of his attention on Wynn and also on the box. And he speaks up.

Jeremy Walker: “I think I can find it.”

Dr. Wynn: “Very good…”

-Wynn hands Jeremy the puzzle box.

Dr. Wynn: “…Here, take it. It’s yours.”

-Jeremy accepts the puzzle box and Wynn gets back up. He turns to all the others.

Dr. Wynn: “Get back. Give him all the space he needs.”

-Wynn and some of the Druid members step back to the far side of the living room, while the other Druid members assist Kara, Danny, Tommy, Melinda and Stephen. They all gather at the far end, while Jeremy finds himself alone with the puzzle box by the entrances into the den and dining room.

-As the camera begins panning away from the others at the far end of the living room, the understated version of the “Hellraiser” theme begins playing. Jeremy looks around in front of him into the darkness of the den. He then looks over to the darkness facing him in the living room. He then looks back into the darkness facing him in the den and chooses to sit down in front of that entrance.

-The camera pans finally pans over to Jeremy as he sits down in front of the den entrance and crosses his legs in front of him. He comfortably faces darkness of the den as if it were his friend. He’s clearly happier with fewer people around and that is only the beginning of his problems.

-Jeremy faces the darkness in front of him, then looks down at the puzzle box in his hands. He turns the box around and looks at the symbols on all six sides. He picks a side and gazes at it. He focuses in on the small circle in the center of the side. He begins feeling out the circle with both thumbs, and creaking can be heard from all around the living room. Much like the creaking of a door. At the same time, a very understated version of the “Hellraiser” theme with the quiet undertones of a lullaby is heard from within the box.

-Jeremy then presses onto the circle to push it in. He pushes the circle in and one side of the box begins opening up over the top. It opens up and a piece slides over to the center. As it does, a strong gust of wind comes in from the entrances to the den and living room. The front door is burst open (Slam!) and a strong gust of wind comes out from the outside as well. The wind burns out the nearest candles by the entrances.

-If that’s not enough, the beastly growls of demons are heard all around the living room. The understated “Hellraiser” theme kicks in a notch and everyone tenses up. Wynn tenses up only a little bit. As much as it creeps him out, he has prepared for this. Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Do I want to know what that is?”

Tommy Doyle: “Even I would rather not find out what it is.”

-The beastly growls drown out and Jeremy faces the darkness of the den where he heard them. He then looks back down at the puzzle box and sees the side closing back into the place. It slides back into a square and the chaotic environment lightens up. He has teased the doorway into this secret world. Now, he has to open it.

-Jeremy turns the puzzle box around to a different side. He stops at a side with a larger circle in the middle. He gazes at the circle, as well as the shapes and symbols around it, and begins feeling it out with both thumbs. As he does, an electrical charge sparks from the box (Ccchhhkkttt!). A little bit shaken up, he takes hold of the box. He now knows this is the way in.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #11  
Old 06-27-2012, 06:21 PM
Helloween - Part 10

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Jeremy gazes at the side of the puzzle box. He begins feeling out the circle with both thumbs again. As he does, the understated “Hellraiser” theme kicks in another notch. Almost immediately, the environment becomes chaotic again. The creaking returns, stronger gusts of winds come in from all three entrances, and the remaining candles burn out. Most of the room turns to complete darkness. Yet, a mysterious light shines over Jeremy allowing him to open the box.

-Jeremy continues feeling out the circle with both thumbs. Finally, the box responds to his foreplay and the circle begins opening up. The circle, as well as eight broken up parts, open up over the top and Jeremy slides them over. He slides them over to the opposite and diagonal openings and pushes them in. He slides them into place and then looks on into darkness of the den in front of him. The light from above him mysteriously disappears.

-The creaking and gusts of wind continue and everyone in the living room can’t believe what they’re experiencing. Wynn, in particular, is in awe.

Dr. Wynn: “My word…”

-Eventually, an outside production of steam pipes is heard. The understated “Hellraiser” theme tones down, and the dreary undertones of the darker version takes over. Light and steam appears from every little inch between the wooden frames in the wall. The darker theme dramatically plays on.

-Suddenly, an opening appears in the living room wall. Breaking the laws of logic and geography, the wall opens up revealing an entrance into another world. An entrance with bright light. The chaotic environment finally lightens up. The creaking stops and the gusts of wind forces itself back outside, shutting the front door (Slam!). All that remains is the light shining through the walls. The dark “Hellraiser” theme tones down and everyone in the living room is in awe.

-Jeremy looks on into the darkness of the den. He then looks all around the living room. He then takes notice as the puzzle box closes itself back into place in his hands. The circle and eight broken parts open up over the top. They slide over to their appropriate openings. And they close back into a square.

-Wynn, still in disbelief, looks around the living room and turns to the others.

Dr. Wynn: “Everyone, stay where you are…”

-Everyone stays put, while Wynn steps forward. He steps over to the opening in the wall. He steps within a foot of it and tries to look beyond the blinding light.

Melinda Wynn: “It’s too late now. You’ve opened the doorway.”

Kara Strode: “The doorway to what?”

Tommy Doyle: “The doorway to Hell.”

-Kara gulps. Wynn continues looking on into the bright light. He then steps away from it. He walks away from the wall and over to Jeremy at the other side of the room. He kneels down and turns to Jeremy.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy, you’ve done it. You’ve solved the puzzle and opened up the doorway into another world to explore. Now, listen to me very carefully. You have already opened the doorway. Until I tell you to, do not attempt to solve the puzzle again. It could put all of us in danger. Do you understand what I’m saying?”

-For a moment, Jeremy keeps his full attention on the puzzle box. He then looks up at Wynn.

Jeremy Walker: “Yes.”

Dr. Wynn: “Very good. Now, I have for you an even more important task. I will let you keep the box. It’s yours. And while it is in your possession, you must watch over it with your life. Do not let anybody take it from you. It is only safe in your hands. If anyone takes it from you and attempts to solve it, they could put all of us in danger. Do you understand what I’m telling you?”

Jeremy Walker: “Yes.”

Dr. Wynn: “Very good. Now, get up. It is time to explore this secret world.”

-Both Wynn and Jeremy stand back up. Wynn leads Jeremy over to the others at the far end of the living room. He turns to Melinda, then over to the other Druid members.

Dr. Wynn: “It’s time to go in. Let’s go. Melinda, both you and the children will stay up front with me. We will lead the way.”

Melinda Wynn: “At this point, you can do whatever you want. Clearly, you’ve been following your own agenda. But leave me out this. I’d rather stay out here.”

Dr. Wynn: “There will be no debating. We’re all going in…”

-Wynn turns to the other Druid members.

Dr. Wynn: “…Let’s go.”

-Wynn steps aside and leads Jeremy and Stephen over to the doorway. Melinda finds herself being forced by a fellow Druid member to step forward. Kara, Danny and Tommy are also forced to step forward by Druid members. Wynn, Melinda, Jeremy and Stephen step up to the bright light welcoming them into Hell. Out of the four of them, it is Melinda and Stephen that appear reluctant to go in. Wynn looks on into the bright light and then speaks up.

Dr. Wynn: “Let’s go. Now.”

-Jeremy and Stephen step forward first. Jeremy finds himself having to motivate Stephen and nudge him forward.

-Wynn steps forward next and Melinda reluctantly steps into the light. Next up are a few Druid members along with Kara, Danny and Tommy. As the remaining Druid members proceed to step into the doorway, the screen fades to white. Or rather, the blinding light of the doorway.

-The screen fades back in to reveal all of them walking through a dark hallway made up of black bricks. They have stepped passed the light and now into darkness. It is so dark, that the Druid members in robes are forced to take off their hoods in order to see. They are revealed to be ordinary men and women ranging from their thirties to fifties. Screams and cries of those suffering can be heard in the distance. Melinda turns to her father.

Melinda Wynn: “I can’t believe you’re making us do this. This is insane. There’s a reason we follow the guidelines of Thorn and the other Runes. No matter how insane they appear to outsiders. And this has nothing to do with any of that. You failed Thorn, and now you’re being guided by own vanity in order to please it.”

Dr. Wynn: “You’re correct. I am following my own vanity to please Thorn. It’s true. I am simply doing everything in the power I have left over from my leadership to make up for my past sins.”

Melinda Wynn: “By going into Hell?”

Dr. Wynn: “No. By seeking the guidance of Hell.”

Melinda Wynn: “That doesn’t make any sense. None of it does.”

-The hallway turns to the left and they follow it.

Dr. Wynn: “Oh, but it does. According to the mythology of Pandora’s Box, somebody must run Hell and watch over it.”

Melinda Wynn: “I am well aware of that. What you’re missing is that we don’t know who runs Hell in the first place.”

Dr. Wynn: “That’s very true. And that is what we’ll find out shortly.”

Melinda Wynn: “What if they don’t listen to you? What if all of us end up stuck here? It might not be too late to go back. We might be able to close the box while we still have time.”

Dr. Wynn: “I don’t think so. We’ve already opened the box and we’re already here. Our presence can’t be unnoticed for too long.”

Melinda Wynn: “I take back what I said. You’re not following your own vanity, you’re just being pigheaded. You can’t let it go, you’re obsessed.”

Dr. Wynn: “I fully accept those charges, as well as the charge of being overly devoted to Thorn.”

-Melinda rolls her eyes.

Melinda Wynn: “No matter what I say, I can’t win with you.”

-The hallway comes to an end, and on the other side is an rotunda revealing five other hallways. Two of them turn directly left and right, there is a middle one heading straight ahead, and there are two more going in diagonal directions. Unlike the hallway they arrived in, they appear to go on forever and feature architectural posts every several feet on each side. Hell itself appears to be a labyrinth that may go in circles.

Melinda Wynn: “Oh my gosh…”

Dr. Wynn: “My goodness…”

-Wynn and Melinda step out into the rotunda, allowing the others to look for themselves. As Kara, Danny and Tommy step out of the hallway and into the rotunda, they can’t believe their eyes.

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh…”

Danny Strode: “Whoa…”

Tommy Doyle: “Wow…”

-Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Did you know about this?”

Tommy Doyle: “No. I’ve heard of Pandora’s Box, but I’ve never actually seen it or any of this before. Trust me, this has nothing to do with Thorn. It’s beyond Thorn. It’s beyond anything I’ve ever seen.”

-Suddenly, the rotunda turns to complete darkness. If it weren’t dark enough, the five hallways dim out and they can barely see a thing. And then, they can. A figure steps out of one of the hallways. He has pale skin and is wearing black leather. Pins are sticking into his face and bald head, while openings in his suit reveal blood stains on his nipples and chest. He is Pinhead, a Cenobite and the Prince of Hell.

-A second figure steps out of another hallway. He also has pale skin and is wearing black leather. He is very tall, and his most notable feature is his deformed head. His mouth has been opened up by wires, revealing open gums and chattering teeth. He also has an open gash in the back of his head. He is the Chatterer Cenobite.

-A third figure steps out of another hallway. Like the others, he has pale skin and is wearing black leather. He is noticeably bigger and fatter, and has a wrinkly head. He also wears dark glasses. He is the Butterball Cenobite.

-One more figure steps out of another hallway. Just like the others, she has pale skin and wears black leather. While her head is bald and less deformed, her most noticeable feature is a metal brace around her neck revealing an open slit throat. She is the Female Cenobite.

-The others cannot believe their eyes. Pinhead turns to all of them. He then turns to Wynn and speaks up with deep and powerful voice.

Pinhead: “What is your business here?”

Dr. Wynn: “To seek your guidance.”

Pinhead: “Incorrect. You have no business here. You have trespassed into Hell without our permission, and now you must suffer…”

-Pinhead turns to the others.

Pinhead: “…All of you must suffer.”

-The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatter away, while the Butterball Cenobite licks his lips at the thought of their suffering. The Female Cenobite, with a raspy and strained voice, speaks up.

Female Cenobite: “I look forward to all your suffering.”

Dr. Wynn: “Please, hear me out.”

Pinhead: “We have listened before to those who have lost their way. They have aimlessly directed us nowhere. We would rather not listen to you.”

Dr. Wynn: “I am not surprised by that.”

Pinhead: “By what?”

Dr. Wynn: “That, perhaps, others have opened the box in the past, not knowing what to expect. Let me assure you, I am not one of them. I know the history of Pandora’s Box. I am aware that it contains a world of pleasure and pain. I chose to open the box in order to meet you, and anyone responsible for watching over Hell.”

Pinhead: “Well, you have now met us. Now, it is time for you to…”

Dr. Wynn: “More importantly, I have respect for you. I respect what you do down here.”

Pinhead: “Do you now?”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes. Very much. You follow a set of rules and you abide by them. You make choices that would be difficult for those who are weak-minded. For every soul who loses their way and falls from grace, you put them in their place and make them suffer for their actions. And for every soul naïve enough to open the doors they don’t know of, you make an example out of them as well.”

Pinhead: “What is your point?”

Dr. Wynn: “My point is that some souls inevitably lose their way and find their way here. And other souls don’t know better, or are destined to suffer, but foolishly fight back. For many years, I have followed my own set of rules. I have not always abided by them, and in fact am not abiding by them right now. That is because I got lost along the way and made mistakes. And I seek your guidance to finish what I have tried so hard to finish.”

Pinhead: “What is it exactly that you seek?”

Dr. Wynn: “I am responsible for watching over a powerful being called Thorn. Thorn has lost its way, because of my direction. What I seek exactly is for you to get through to Thorn, so that it will listen to my guidance again. So, that it will finally live up to its destiny.”

Pinhead: “I am aware of Thorn. I am aware that it is a being nearly as powerful as I am. Allow me to understand. You are down here, so that you can control Thorn once again.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes.”

Pinhead: “You lost your way along your journey. And as a result, Thorn is now lost too.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes.”

Pinhead: “And you are seeking my guidance in order to point Thorn back in the right direction. In your direction.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes.”

Pinhead: “Well…normally, I would turn down your request and put you in your place. You have certainly lost your way along your journey to find yourself down here. However, against my better judgment, I will grant your request. Not because of your apparent need for redemption or the very apparent vanity you carry. No, I am granting your request, so that I may meet Thorn. For once, to meet another being of pure evil on the same grounds. It is not often I, or any of us, get that opportunity. Not down here. Not in Hell. I will grant your request. However, if Thorn fails to cooperate, you will suffer the consequences. No matter what, you will suffer the consequences. After all, it was your devotion to Thorn that opened the box.”

Dr. Wynn: “I understand. I would like to add one more thing.”

Pinhead: “And what is that?”

Dr. Wynn: “I willingly accept sole responsibility for opening the box. And I also wish to accept sole responsibility for Thorn’s actions, as well as anyone’s actions, down here in Hell. Once it is all over, I will accept the consequences of my actions. For defying Thorn and for opening the box. And I wish for the others to go free and return where they came from.”

-Pinhead looks on at Wynn, then turns to all the others. He then turns back to Wynn.

Pinhead: “We will see. Until then, feel free. Explore. I’ll wait for Thorn to show up. I can sense Thorn now. It is outside waiting. But be forewarned. From this point on, you will face your own personal Hell…”

-Pinhead turns to the others.

Pinhead: “…All of you will.”

-Pinhead and the other Cenobites step back into the darkness of their hallways and disappear. They are able to see into the hallways again and all the Cenobites have vanished. Wynn looks around, then turns to Melinda.

Dr. Wynn: “You see, the rest of you are in safe hands. I believe they can get through to Thorn.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #12  
Old 06-27-2012, 06:29 PM
Helloween - Part 11

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Melinda Wynn: “They didn’t promise anything. For all we know, they could be screwing with us.”

Dr. Wynn: “Maybe. But I’m willing to have faith. So should you…”

-Wynn turns to the other Druid members.

Dr. Wynn: “…Now, let’s go…”

-Wynn looks at the five hallways before them and then looks into the middle one.

Dr. Wynn: “…Let’s go this way…”

-Wynn begins stepping forward with Jeremy and Stephen, and Melinda reluctantly follows. Kara, Danny and Tommy are once again forced by the other Druid members to follow. As they do, Kara turns to Tommy and speaks up very quietly.

Kara Strode: “What do we do now? How do we get out of this?”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t know yet. I was only prepared for Thorn. I wasn’t prepared for this.”

Kara Strode: “How much do you know about Pandora’s Box?”

Tommy Doyle: “Only a little. It was one of the things I studied when I became interested in Michael Myers. When I realized Pandora’s Box didn’t have anything to do with him, I moved on to another supernatural source, and eventually to the Druids.”

-One of the Druid members turns to Tommy and raises his finger.

Druid Member: “Shhh.”

-Tommy quiets down, and so does Kara. Back in the front, Wynn leads Melinda and all the others through the hallway. As he steps past two architectural posts on the walls, he glances at them.

Dr. Wynn: “Simply marvelous…”

-Melinda sighs and turns to him.

Melinda Wynn: “You must be sick of hearing from me. But I’m just trying to understand why you decided to hijack my leadership, and hijack it like this. I thought you regretted stepping in Thorn’s way five years ago. So, why are you defying Thorn again? And defying my leadership? Do you believe that little in my direction?”

Dr. Wynn: “On the contrary, my dear, I completely believe in your direction. I am just looking out for it and your life in this particular matter. If Thorn was cooperating with us in the first place, I wouldn’t have turned to such drastic action.”

Melinda Wynn: “We talked about this. We talked about how Thorn had lost its way. I thought you were going to finally let me guide Thorn and reach out to it if I had to. No matter what.”

Dr. Wynn: “I will fully admit to lying to you on that matter. When I handed the cult over to you, I had to give you the false impression that everything was in your hands. When, in fact, several of the members still believed in me. But I will be honest with you. All your guidance and suggestions to make up for our actions in 1995 worked out wonderfully. That also goes for your direction in guiding the Strode’s back to Haddonfield. I truly do believe you have the makings of a great leader. I mean that. All I am doing is making sure that Thorn succeeds. Once it has, you will be free to run the cult as promised. And in return, I will suffer the consequences they impose on me down here in Hell. I will accept it, knowing I helped guide Thorn to its rightful destiny.”

Melinda Wynn: “But why? Do you have a death wish?”

Dr. Wynn: “After the number of mistakes I have made in my my leadership, as well as my lifetime, you could say so.”

-Melinda looks on in disbelief. She then speaks up.

Melinda Wynn: “Okay. If that is true, why Pandora’s Box? Would you really rather suffer the consequences of defying Thorn in Hell, rather than the consequences imposed by Thorn and the other Runes?”

Dr. Wynn: “You really want to know why I chose Pandora’s Box as a means to reach out to Thorn?”

Melinda Wynn: “Yes.”

Dr. Wynn: “I chose it, because I could no longer control Thorn five years ago. After serving under Thorn for over thirty years, it got sick and tired of my direction. If anything can get through to Thorn at this point, it is another powerful being similar to Thorn. I was aware of your devotion to Thorn and considered the possibility that you might be able to get through to it. However, I was unwilling to risk your precious life over it. So unwilling, that I am willing to suffer in Hell, so that you may guide Thorn on the next Samhain to come when it returns from its rest.”

Melinda Wynn: “Okay. I can understand that line of thinking. As insane as it sounds. But there’s one major point I think you’re overlooking.”

Dr. Wynn: “And what is that?”

Melinda Wynn: “You can’t bargain with evil. After all, you couldn’t bargain with Thorn five years ago. What makes you think you will have better luck bargaining with them?”

Dr. Wynn: “I have considered that. But consider this. You have studied Thorn. You must know what happened on the date of 1831.”

Melinda Wynn: “I do. A group defied Thorn and won. It took over a decade for Thorn to come back strong and start over.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes, and the circumstances our ancestors faced then were as dire as the circumstances we have been faced with since 1995. And I can’t afford to let that happen again. Even if it means that I suffer the ultimate sacrifice.”

Melinda Wynn: “Even if it means I never see you again?”

Dr. Wynn: “If it means that you will lead without my guiding hand on the next Samhain…yes. I believe in Thorn that much, and I believe in your direction that much as well.”

-Melinda, in disbelief over her father’s decision, sighs.

Melinda Wynn: “Oh, Dad…I’ll miss you…”

Dr. Wynn: “I will miss you too, dear…”

-Cut back to the Doyle house. As the understated “Halloween” theme begins playing, cut to the living room where the doorway to Hell remains in the wall. Cut to the den where much of the light is shining through every inch between the wooden frames in the walls. Cut to the dining room. And cut to the kitchen, where the light is also shining through the walls.

-Cut to the point of view of a mysterious figure as he/she opens the back kitchen door. Heavy breathing is heard. He/she steps inside and looks over at the light shining through the wooden frames in the wall. He/she then looks over to the dining room and begins stepping forward. The mysterious figure makes his/her way through the kitchen. He/she then steps into the dining room.

-Cut to the living room entrance. Once again in full view, Michael steps out of the dining room. He steps into the living room and looks around. He turns his Halloween-masked head to the mysterious doorway in the wall, where the blinding light is coming from. He then looks over to the den into the entrance where he can also see the blinding light. Finally, he turns his attention back to the doorway and begins stepping over to it.

-Michael makes his way across the living room. He steps over to the far end of it and over to the doorway. He steps within a few feet of the doorway and stops. He looks into the blinding light and tilts his head to the side. He stands his ground for a moment and then begins stepping forward. He bravely steps forward and into the doorway. As he does, the screen fades to white.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Michael walking down a hallway. The understated “Halloween” theme tones down and the understated “Hellraiser” theme takes over. Michael has passed the light and is now entering the darkness. He has always been comfortable around darkness. But will he be comfortable within the darkness of Hell? He makes his way down the dark hallway. He then reaches the left turn and steps into it.

-Cut to the rotunda at the end of the hallway. Michael steps out of the hallway and looks around at the five hallways from his left to his right. He then looks into the hallway in the middle and begins stepping forward. He steps up to hallway and is about to walk in. Unexpectedly, he stops in his tracks. He steps back and turns his Halloween-masked to the hallway all the way to the left. He stands there for a moment and looks into the darkness. Is somebody there?

-A moment passes and Michael turns his attention back to the middle hallway. He steps into it and begins making his way into the labyrinth. The camera stays put in the rotunda and focuses on Michael as he steps further into the hallway. As he slowly disappears into the darkness, the understated “Hellraiser” theme begins toning down.

-The camera then pans around to the hallway to the left. It pans into the other hallway and into the darkness. And unexpectedly, Pinhead steps out of it. The Female Cenobite also steps out of the darkness and she turns to Pinhead.

Female Cenobite: “I’m surprised you didn’t make an example out of them. As well as Thorn. They have all trespassed into Hell.”

Pinhead: “Who says I’m not making an example out of them? The game is just beginning.”

Female Cenobite: “What is your interest in Thorn? It has nothing to do with us or Leviathan.”

Pinhead: “Except that is another sanctuary of the occult that follows supernatural beliefs and black magic. Just as each of us are designed to be pure in darkness, so is Thorn. And I admire it for that.”

Female Cenobite: “We have lost our way before. Whatever you have in mind, you better not displease Leviathan.”

Pinhead: “I do not plan on doing that. If Thorn fails to cooperate with us, I will make an example out of it. As well as all of them.”

-Pinhead and the Female Cenobite step back into the darkness and disappear within it.

-Cut to a random hallway. Kara, Danny and Tommy continue being forced by the other Druid members to follow Wynn. Tommy turns to Kara and Danny, and tries to speak up very quietly.

Tommy Doyle: “I have an idea. When we reach the end of this hallway, let’s try to break free of them and run into another hallway. If we’re going to get out of here at all, we have to separate from them first.”

-Wynn leads Melinda and all the others through the hallway. That’s when he begins making out the darkness ahead of them. It is the end of the hallway and another rotunda. Stephen and Jeremy step out into the rotunda first, followed by Wynn and Melinda. A few Druid members step out next, followed by other Druid members staying close to Kara, Danny and Tommy.

-Wynn and others in the front stop where they are and look around. To their left are four other hallways with the architectural posts, and to the right is a shorter hallway similar to the one they arrived in. It appears every point and rotunda in the labyrinth is set up like this.

-Kara, Danny and Tommy step out into the rotunda. At first, they step forward and stop with the other Druid members. And then, as the remaining Druid members step out of the hallway, Tommy suddenly pushes one of Druid members in front of him (Thwonk!) He pushes the Druid member into the wall (Thud!) and turns to Kara and Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “Kara, Danny! Now!”

-Kara and Danny begin running away into the nearest hallway. Tommy lets go of the Druid member and begins running in the same direction as them. The three remaining Druid members, stepping out of the hallway, begin attempting to reach out for Tommy and stop him. And Wynn turns around and begins calling orders.

Dr. Wynn: “Stop them at once! . . .”

-However, before the others can get away, and before the Druid members can stop them, the screen freezes. The screen freezes and all of them are stopped in their tracks. Next thing Kara knows, she is alone in another rotunda in the labyrinth. In another rotunda is Danny. In another rotunda is Tommy. In another rotunda is Wynn. In another rotunda is Melinda. In another rotunda is Stephen. And in another rotunda is Jeremy. All of them, as well as the twelve other Druid members, have been separated all over the labyrinth.

-Kara looks around her rotunda and tenses up.

Kara Strode: “Danny? Tommy?”

-Danny looks around his rotunda and also tenses up.

Danny Strode: “Mom? Tommy?”

-Tommy looks around his rotunda. Without saying a word, he tenses up. Melinda looks around her rotunda and tenses up.

Melinda Wynn: “Dad? Dad?”

-Wynn looks around his rotunda and tenses up. Without saying a word, he looks worried over the decision he made. Has he, in fact, put everyone in danger? Or is separating him from his daughter their way of making him face his own personal Hell?

-Stephen looks around his rotunda and tenses up a little. At only five years of age, he has hardly been able to comprehend the predicament from the start. Jeremy looks around his rotunda, but doesn’t show any visible fear. He looks more interested in venturing around the various hallways than fearing them. Tommy continues looking around his rotunda, only tensing up a little bit. He then mutters to himself.

Tommy Doyle: “Kara…Danny…be calm, relax…Where ever you are, I’ll find you…We’ll find each other, and we’ll find the way out of here…”

-Tommy looks around at all six hallways. He chooses one of the five regular hallways and begins stepping forward. Kara continue looking around her rotunda and tenses up big time. She then sighs and braces herself. She looks around at all six hallways. She chooses one of the five regular hallways and begins stepping forward.

-Danny continues looking around his rotunda and tenses up big time. Then, like his mother, he sighs and braces himself. He looks around at all six hallways. He then chooses one of the five regular hallways and begins stepping forward. Wynn continues looking around his rotunda and mutters to himself.

Dr. Wynn: “…It is not a trick on their part…It is just a game…It has to be…Being in Hell was never supposed to be easy…I’ll find Melinda…And they’ll let her go…They’ll have to…They’ll simply have to…Her heart wasn’t in this…Mine was…They’ll have to let her go…”

-Wynn sighs and braces himself. He looks around at all six hallways. He then chooses one of the five regular hallways and begins stepping forward. Melinda continues looking around her rotunda. She tenses up big time and mutters to herself.

Melinda Wynn: “…It’s too late now…They’ve separated us…At least me…They’re not going to let us go, will they?...They are screwing with us after all…”

-A moment passes and Melinda finally sighs. She braces herself and looks around at all six hallways. She then picks one of the five regular hallways and begins stepping forward. Stephen continues looking around his rotunda. Looking very unsure of what is going on, he begins stepping forward into one of the five regular hallways.

-Jeremy continues looking around his rotunda. His eyes light up as he looks around at all six hallways and the darkness they contain. This is a world he’s been waiting to explore. He looks around at all six hallways. And unexpectedly, he chooses the shorter hallway instead of the five regular ones. He turns around and begins stepping forward.

-Cut to a random hallway. Cut to Michael’s point of view as he makes his way down the hallway and breathes heavily. The hunt is now on and he considers all of them his prey.

TO BE CONTINUED ON SATURDAY...
Reply With Quote
  #13  
Old 06-27-2012, 06:59 PM
A little "director" commentary...

That is the first 86 pages and there are 109 left to go. Just to be on the safe side, I'll leave the commentary in spoiler tags...

Spoiler:
...This is a tricky setup to an unlikely concept and I think it goes down pretty smoothly. First, a little "Halloween" action, then the re-introduction of the Druid cult. And after that, the re-introduction to the world of Pandora's Box.

For those that read "Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers," here is Drew Mackenzie once again playing a part. However, making him and the whole Mackenzie family part of the Druid cult was a refreshing change of pace. I also borrowed part of the action from H9 to make the setup in "Helloween" possible. But from this point on, this is a completely different Halloween-oriented sequel.

There is the introduction of Dr. Wynn's grown up daughter, Melinda. She, and the whole cult, had a brief presence in H9 and also had a minor part in another H-sequel I wrote before it. But in "Helloween," she has more to do and was an interesting character to write for. In that other sequel, she was also infatuated with Tommy. Picking up where H6 left off with an heir to Dr. Wynn may be an obvious idea to anyone looking to continue the story, especially to freshen up the storyline. It's also possible that it's redundant from older movies and stories, and was in the back of mind when I began writing my fan-fiction sequels. Her character contributes to Dr. Wynn's backstory in the long run, and his backstory will be completely revealed by the end of "Helloween." You'll see. I think you'll be surprised.

Anyone who has seen "Hellbound: Hellraiser II" may notice right away the similarities between it's setup and also the setup of "Helloween." They each have a doctor in charge of an institution who use a child with a disability to open Pandora's Box. I am guilty to repeating that angle. However, Jeremy's backstory is entirely different from the girl, Tiffany, who opened the puzzle box in "Hellraiser II" and goes in a different direction. You'll see.

Now, the setup is complete and Michael is free to begin hunting for blood down in Hell. There is also the issue of every character's personal Hell. At a given point, every main character will experience their own personal Hell. Whatever it is that scares them most. Kirsty Cotton and Tiffany experienced their own personal Hells in "Hellraiser II." This aspect alone adds another nice touch to the story in "Helloween"...


...The next several parts will be posted Saturday.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-27-2012 at 07:10 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #14  
Old 06-29-2012, 11:02 PM
Helloween - Part 12

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to three random hallways. In one of them is Kara, in another one is Danny, and in the last one is Tommy. All three of them step past architectural posts and find themselves reaching the end of their hallways. They step into separate rotundas and look around. And before they can decide with way to go next, the screen fades out.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Tommy Doyle and Lindsey Wallace being driven down their block by authorities. The date “October 31, 1978” appears. The word “Halloween” appears after and the understated “Halloween” theme begins playing. They approach their family homes, and there are emergency vehicles parked at both houses.

-There is also a mob of neighbors demanding to know what’s going on. The authorities drive around the mob, and begin driving Tommy and Lindsey away from the crime scene. As the flashing lights of the emergency vehicles reflect in the rear window Tommy and Lindsey are looking out of, the understated “Halloween” theme tones down.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Tommy and his parents moving into a new house in the neighborhood. As the movers carry his family’s furniture into the house, he wanders down the sidewalk. And coming from the opposite direction is Lindsey. Tommy and Lindsey step up to each other. They face each other and then hug. They have been told very little about what happened that Halloween, but they know they survived something important. And knowing that Lindsey’s family has also moved to another house in the neighborhood instead of moving away, Tommy knows he’ll be okay. She’ll be there for him.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Tommy and Lindsey walking down a hallway together in middle school. They’re now in their early teens and they’ve remained friends. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal and Tommy and Lindsey walking down a hallway together in high school. They’re now in their mid-to-late teens and are still friends after their experience.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Tommy attending college and talking on the phone. On the other end of the line is Lindsey attending a separate college, but keeping a long distance relationship with Tommy.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Tommy and Lindsey moving into an apartment. They are now in their mid-twenties. They watch from outside as the movers carry their furniture into the building. Holding Lindsey’s hand, Tommy leans over and kisses her. Lindsey leans over and kisses him.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Tommy and Lindsey making love under the sheets of a bed. The camera pans away from them and out the window of the apartment. With Lindsey to count on in this alternate lifetime, he is happier and appears to lead a normal life.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Danny Strode walking home from school. The date “October 31, 1995” appears. The word “Halloween” appears after and the understated “Halloween” theme begins playing. As Danny makes his way down the block, he sees a white cargo van on the corner of the next block. Standing next to it and watching him is the man in black. He starts walking slower, but he finds himself drawn to the mysterious figure. And without Tommy Doyle to drop in and unintentionally startle him, his fate is sealed.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Kara Strode arriving home…to the Myers house. She steps up to the porch and opens the front door, only to discover it locked. She pulls out the keys and unlocks the door, but the key chain inside is preventing it from fully opening.

Kara Strode: “Mom, I’m home…Hello?”

-Dead silence. Moments later, she is walking around the side of the house. Moments after that, she is getting inside through the back door. She steps into the kitchen and looks around.

Kara Strode: “Mom?”

-More dead silence. Moments later, she is looking around the ground floor.

Kara Strode: “Mom? Danny?”

-More dead silence. A moment after that, she is stepping up to the stairs.

Kara Strode: “Mom? Are you there?”

-More dead silence. Moments later, she is stepping down a hallway on the second floor. She steps up to a bedroom and reaches for the door. She slowly opens the door and steps inside. And nobody is there. By now, Danny should be home from school, but both he and his grandmother are missing.

-As Kara stands there, cut to the point of view of Michael as he approaches her from behind. Breathing heavily, he steps up behind her and raises a kitchen knife (Shing!). Kara hears him and turns around.

Kara Strode: “Nooo! Nooo!”

-Before Kara can get away, Michael reaches over to grab her with his left hand (Clench!). And with his right hand, he swings the knife back (Swish!).

Kara Strode: “Nooo!”

-As Michael faces Kara with no mercy and proceeds to swing the knife forward (Swish!), the understated “Halloween” theme tones down and the camera pans right up to Kara.

-The camera pans away from Kara to reveal her at her private practice. She, a licensed psychologist, is trying to get through to a client and help him with his problems. Suddenly, the door to her office opens. Policemen and doctors walk in and turn to her. They then turn to the client in an unusual manner. The client turns to them also in an unusual manner. And they all turn their attention back to her in a sinister manner. They are all Druid members, and they plan on keeping her quiet about their dark secret.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Kara standing before a judge in a court. The judge turns to her, then over to the policemen and doctors. They turn to the judge in the same unusual manner as before. The judge turns to them in an unusual manner, and turns back to Kara in a sinister manner. The judge is also a Druid member, and he/she is insuring that she will be put away.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Kara being assisted down a hallway by doctors. Wearing a straitjacket, she has been declared mentally incompetent. They are putting her away and leaving Danny alone in the outside world. She will not be able to protect him or herself.

-The doctors lead Kara to a door. As they do, Danny runs after to stop them. Other doctors step in and hold him back. Danny turns to his mother. Kara turns to her son. The doctors then unlock the door. They unlock the door and force her inside a padded room. Kara falls back into the padded room, unable to pick herself up. She then looks over at Danny one more time. And she watches as they shut the door.

-Back in the hallway, Danny watches as they lock the door and throw away the key. Back in the padded room, Kara looks around and immediately begins to feel the claustrophobia setting in. Just as she is licensed to declare anyone mentally incompetent in extreme cases, they are declaring her mentally incompetent in order to prevent her from warning the outside world about them.

-Back in the hallway, Danny finds himself alone. The doctors continue holding him back and he can’t get away. That’s when an ordinary man and woman approach him. They step up to him and the doctors let him go. The man and woman look down at Danny in a warm and welcoming manner. They will now be his parents from now on.

-They look on at Danny for a moment and then look over to the doctors. The doctors turn to them in an unusual manner. His new parents look on at them oddly and then also turn to them in an unusual manner. Danny’s new parents look back down at him and in a sinister manner. They are also Druid members and they plan on raising Danny as one of their own. As Danny looks up in terror, the camera pans right up to him.

-The camera pans away from Danny to reveal in the school he attended in witness protection. He is standing in a hallway and students are passing him by. Some are even stepping right through him as if he were transparent – as if he didn’t matter, or had nowhere to go. Danny moves his legs, but they are taking him nowhere. He finds himself stuck in space and time. He watches as the other students pass him by, leaving him stuck at square one.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Danny stuck in space in another hallway. This time in high school. He is now in his mid-to-late teens, but he doesn’t feel any older or wiser. As before, students are passing him by and stepping through him as if he didn’t exist. He is still stuck at square one. As the students pass him by, time is moving faster. He and the other students are aging at a quicker pace from freshman year to senior year.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Danny stuck in space in another hallway. This time at college. He is now in his twenties, but he still feels like a kid. As before, students are passing him by and also stepping through his transparent body. There is nothing he can do to move on. He is still stuck at square one. As the students pass him by, time is moving faster than before. He and the other students are aging at a very quick pace over the several years required to graduate from the traditional colleges.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Danny stuck in space in another hallway. This time in an office building. He is now a grown-up, but he might as well still be a kid. His co-workers are passing him by and stepping through his transparent body. Time is moving much faster. He and his co-workers are rapidly aging from their thirties to forties to fifties and on. Right down to old age. Everyone else has moved on with their lives, but Danny hasn’t. At least he doesn’t feel like he has. He still feels like he’s stuck at square one. Will he ever be able to move on and grow up?

-The screen fades out and then back in reveal Kara, Danny and Tommy back in their separate rotundas. Each of them has just experienced their own personal Hells. For Tommy, it is living a normal life – but at the cost of Kara’s and Danny’s lives. For Kara, it is being put away and not being able to protect Danny. And for Danny, it is being stuck at square one for the rest of his life.

-All three of them tense up. That couldn’t have been more unsettling. They brace themselves and look around their rotundas. Which way will they go next? Kara and Danny ultimately pick regular hallways, while Tommy turns his attention to the shorter hallway. He looks over at it questionably, then begins stepping forward.

-Cut to a random hallway. A Druid member, Samantha, steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. Cut to another hallway and cut to Michael’s point of view as he breathes heavily and also sees an rotunda coming up. Samantha reaches the end of the hallway. She steps out into the rotunda and suddenly finds herself bumping into Bruce – another
Druid member. At first, she is startled. And then, she sighs of relief.

Samantha: “Bruce!”

Bruce: “Samantha!”

Samantha: “I’m so glad I found somebody. It feels like I’ve been walking around here forever.”

Bruce: “Me, too. If I knew this is what Dr. Wynn had in mind, I never would have sabotaged Melinda.”

Samantha: “Me neither. This is wrong. We shouldn’t be here.”

Bruce: “Did you experience anything weird?”

Samantha: “You mean like a vision?”

Bruce: “Yeah, and also something like a nightmare. It was awful.”

Samantha: “Mine, too.”

-Cut a random hallway. A Druid member, Warren, steps past two architectural posts and beings making out the rotunda up ahead. He reaches the end of the hallway steps into the rotunda. And just as he is about to look around, Michael steps out of the nearest hallway and reaches for his throat (Clench!).

Warren: “Argh!”

-The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing and Michael slams Warren against the wall (Thud!).

Warren: “Argh!”

-With his left hand on Warren’s throat, Michael breathes heavily and stares him down with his dead-like eyes.

Warren: “No! Argh! No!”

-With his right hand, Michael swings his knife back. He then swings the knife forward (Swish!) and proceeds to stab Warren in the chest (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Warren: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-Michael continues stabbing away (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!), and Warren coughs up blood (Spew!).

Warren: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH! Bleah!”

-Michael continues stabbing Warren until he starts losing it (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Warren: “Argh! ARGH!...Argh!...Argh…”

-Michael stabs Warren one last time (Shing!). Warren’s head sags over and the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down. He lets go of Warren’s body (Thud!) and steps back. Michael steps out into the rotunda and looks around at the four other hallways to choose from. He then turns around and looks over into the shorter hallway. He looks into the darkness facing him inside it and begins stepping forward.

-The camera stays put in the rotunda and Michael disappears into the hallway. The camera then pans around into the middle hallway. It pans up to the darkness of the hallway and Pinhead steps out of it.

Pinhead: “Bravo. Bravo.”

-The Female Cenobite steps out of the darkness next, followed by the Chatterer Cenobite and the Butterball Cenobite. All four of them step up to Warren’s slain body. Pinhead could not be more impressed with Michael’s handiwork, as well as the show he put on for them.

Pinhead: “This is the passion I admire. And the drive I so seldom see…”

-The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatters away, while the Butterball Cenobite licks his lips.

Pinhead: “…He never thought twice about what he was doing. He was just doing what came natural. And the way he let it out was utterly beautiful. The only thing that could hold him back is the soul hidden deep within him. Any fool might attempt to reach out to him and make him weak. I must prevent that from ever taking place.”

Female Cenobite: “What do you have in mind for him? By making him one of us?”

Pinhead: “As matter of fact, yes. I see Thorn as an ally. If we can get Thorn to abide by Leviathan’s order and work alongside us, it will be a valuable asset to Hell.”

Female Cenobite: “I don’t see it.”

Pinhead: “You do not see what?”

Female Cenobite: “As much as I admire Thorn’s intensity, I don’t see it willing to join our side. I fear this is a lost cause. You might want to make an example out Thorn and all of them now before you anger Leviathan.”

Pinhead: “Nonsense. Thorn shares similar beliefs to what we represent. I have a strong feeling it will hear us out. I do not believe it will create trouble. At this point, there is more blood and a lot more suffering to be had. We must allow Thorn to work within its means before approaching it.”

-Pinhead steps back into the darkness, followed by the three other Cenobites.

-Cut to a random hallway. Kara steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. She reaches the end of the hallway and steps into the rotunda. She looks around it and does not see anybody within the four other hallways. She then looks over to the shorter hallway and somebody suddenly steps out of it. She is Florence and also a Druid member. She turns to Kara in a sinister manner.

Florence: “The game is still on. Come here…”

-Florence begins stepping forward, and Kara begins stepping back.

Florence: “…Even down here in Hell, there is still no escape from us. No matter what, your fate is sealed.”

-Kara steps out of the rotunda and back into the hallway she came from.

Kara Strode: “I don’t believe in fate. I believe in choice.”

-As Florence begins stepping into the hallway, she has a little laugh.

Florence: “You’re a Strode. Since you were born, you were destined to suffer. The moment your family took custody of Laurie Myers, all of you were destined to suffer.”

-Suddenly, Michael steps out of the nearest hallway. He turns around and turns to both of them. Florence turns to him and speaks up.

Florence: “There she is, Michael. Go get her. She’s yours.”

-Michael turns his Halloween-masked head to Florence, then over to Kara. He then turns his attention back to the Florence and reaches for her throat (Clench!).

Florence: “Argh!”

-With his left hand, Michael slams Florence against the wall (Thud!).

Florence: “Argh! Hey!”

-With his right hand, Michael swings his knife back (Swish!) and begins stabbing Florence in the chest (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Florence: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-Kara witnesses as Michael proceeds to stab Florence to death (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Splatter!).

Florence: “Argh! ARGH! Argh!...”

Kara Strode: “Oh, God!”

-Kara shrugs and runs back in direction she originally came from.

-Cut to a random hallway. Stephen steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. He steps out into the rotunda and looks around. At the same time, Danny steps out of the nearest hallway. Upon seeing Stephen, he sighs of relief.

Danny Strode: “Stephen Lloyd! I finally found you!”

Stephen Lloyd: “Who are you?”

Danny Strode: “You don’t remember me, but I’m Danny Strode. My family knew you when you were a baby. We knew you as Stephen Lloyd. Is that what they call you now?”

Stephen Lloyd: “No. My name is Oliver Lambert.”

Danny Strode: “I’m not surprised. They probably changed your name in child services.”

Stephen Lloyd: “Child services?”

Danny Strode: “Never mind. I’ll tell you along the way. Follow me. We have to find the others.”

-Stephen, or Oliver, begins following Danny into another regular hallway. As he does, Danny turns to him.

Danny Strode: “What would you rather be called? Stephen or Oliver?”

Stephen Lloyd: “I like Stephen better. Besides, I didn’t like how he called me by my name.”

Danny Strode: “You must mean Dr. Wynn. I didn’t like how he used to talk to me either.”

-Cut to a random hallway. Jeremy steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. He eagerly makes his way toward the rotunda, wanting to see more of Hell. He wants to see all of it. He reaches the end of the hallway and steps into the rotunda. And before he can decide which way to go next, the screen fades out.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Jeremy in the living room of his home. He is solving a jigsaw puzzle. Hanging all over the living room are jigsaw puzzles. His mother walks in with a gentleman friend and she turns to him.

Mother: “Jeremy, keep on working on the puzzle. Don’t mind us. Have fun.”

-Jeremy looks up at his mother, but hardly acknowledges her gentleman friend. She then walks away and leads the gentleman friend away into a hallway. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal a few hours passing. Danny fits in the last remaining pieces of the puzzle. He fits them all in and his eyes light up at the result. It is beautiful. However, he is quickly losing interest. The challenge is over. What else is there for him to do?

-Suddenly, a disturbance in the hallway gains his interest. He gets up from the table and walks over to the hallway. He steps into the hallway and over to his mother’s bedroom. He reaches for the door and opens it. What he sees is his mother’s gentleman friend slipping his pants on and slapping her across the face (Slap!).

Mother: “Aah!”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #15  
Old 06-29-2012, 11:11 PM
Helloween - Part 13

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Jeremy, seeing the only person he can connect to being physically abused, shrugs.

Jeremy Walker: “Mom!”

-Jeremy’s mother, laying within the covers of the bed, turns to him.

Mother: “Jeremy, it’s okay! Mommy’s okay!”

-The gentleman friend shrugs.

Gentleman Friend: “No, it’s not okay! I’m sick of and tired of playing games with you! I don’t want to hide from your good-for-nothing husband anymore! I want to be with you and stop sneaking around!”

Mother: “I told you, I’d consider committing to you if you would learn how to control your temper!”

Gentleman Friend: “You know, it might be easier for me to do that if you’d finally get around to splitting up with Bob in the first place! I can’t keep lying to his face at the office! He’s going to find out!”

-Jeremy, having heard enough, shrugs.

Jeremy Walker: “Get away from her!”

-The gentleman friend turns to Jeremy and prevails.

Gentleman Friend: “You’re telling me to get away from her? You can’t even look me in the eye when you say that!”

-Jeremy focuses all his attention on the gentleman friend and speaks up like he’s never spoken up before.

Jeremy Walker: “Get away from her! Now!”

-The gentleman friend turns to Jeremy for a moment and has a little laugh.

Gentleman Friend: “That was good! That’s the most I’ve ever seen out of you!”

Mother: “Stop patronizing my son!”

Gentleman Friend: “Hey, as long as you can’t make up your fucking mind, I’ll patronize him as long as I want. All he does is play with fucking puzzles all day!”

-Jeremy’s mother looks on in disbelief. She can’t believe he said that. Jeremy looks on up at the gentleman friend with his full attention. He then looks away, turns around and begins stepping out into the hallway.

Gentleman Friend: “That’s right, kid. Walk away. It will be better for your health.”

-Jeremy disappears into the hallway and his mother sighs of disbelief.

Mother: “I can’t believe you just did that. He’s only a kid.”

Gentleman Friend: “Yeah, a kid with serious mental problems. Who knows what goes on inside his head.”

Mother: “I take it back. I’ve finally made my decision.”

Gentleman Friend: “And what’s what? Are you sticking with your husband, just because I had a few words with your kid?”

Mother: “That, and because you are an inconsiderate asshole period. I don’t know why I considered leaving my husband for you. Now that I’ve seen your true colors, it’s over.”

Gentleman Friend: “Is it now? I don’t think so.”

-Jeremy appears back in the hallway and steps up to the doorway. He stops and faces the gentleman friend with his hands behind his back. The gentleman friend turns to his mother in disbelief, then over to Jeremy.

Gentleman Friend: “Back for more, kid?”

-Jeremy looks on up at the gentleman friend with his full attention. The gentleman friend looks down at Jeremy with his full attention. That’s when the camera pans down behind Jeremy to reveal him holding a kitchen knife.

Gentleman Friend: “Well? Don’t you have anything to say?”

-Jeremy continues looking up at the gentleman friend with his full attention.

Mother: “Jeremy, please. Get out of here. It’s over between us. After today, you’ll never see him again.”

Gentleman Friend: “I don’t think so.”

Mother: “I do. It’s over.”

-The gentleman friend shrugs and slaps her across the face (Slaps!).

Mother: “Aah!”

Gentleman Friend: “I said, I don’t think so!”

-Jeremy shrugs and finally lets out all of his buried emotion.

Jeremy Walker: “Mom!”

-Jeremy runs into the bedroom and over to the gentleman. He runs right up to him and stabs him in the leg (Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Gentleman Friend: “Aaaahhh!”

-The gentleman friend falls to the floor (Thud!) and Jeremy continues the attack. He proceeds to stab him in the chest (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Splatter!).

Gentleman Friend: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! Stop!”

-Jeremy’s mother gets back up and turns to Jeremy.

Mother: “Jeremy, stop what you’re doing!”

-Jeremy, however, has his full attention on her gentleman friend and can’t focus on two things at once. He continues stabbing him in the chest (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Gentleman Friend: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!...”

-Jeremy’s mother gets off the bed with the sheets around her and takes the knife from Jeremy (Clench!).

Mother: “Jeremy, that’s enough! Stop!”

-Jeremy looks down at her gentleman friend with his full attention still on him. His mother also looks down at him. By now, her gentleman friend is coughing up blood (Spew!) and losing it.

Gentleman Friend: “Argh…Argh…Bleah…Argh…”

-His head sags over to the side. He’s dead.

Mother: “Jeremy, what have you done?...”

-Jeremy continues focusing all his attention on her gentleman friend. And he can’t seem to focus it on anything else. As if in a trance, he’s lost it. The camera pans into his eyes. It pans into his eyes to reveal Jeremy falling back into a giant puzzle. Every piece breaks up and falls into darkness. Jeremy falls into darkness and seems to be forever lost within it.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Jeremy in a room with Dr. Wynn. He is now at Smith’s Grove Warren County Sanitarium, and Dr. Wynn is attempting to reach out to him. Jeremy looks on aimlessly and is not responding. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal both Dr. Wynn and Melinda Wynn attempting to reach out to Jeremy. After a few months in Smith’s Grove, he is still not responding to their treatment.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Melinda Wynn successfully reaching out to Jeremy. After a several months in Smith’s Grove, she is finally getting him to focus. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal both Dr. Wynn and Melinda Wynn reaching out to Jeremy. After nearly a year in Smith’s Grove, he is able to focus on both of them. He isn’t saying much, but he is opening up more.

-As Dr. Wynn and Melinda Wynn both reach out to Jeremy, the camera pans into his eyes again. It pans into his eyes to reveal the giant puzzle half completed. And standing within the darkness beneath the puzzle is Jeremy. Part of him is able to respond to reality, but part of him is still lost.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Jeremy back in the rotunda. He has just experienced his own personal Hell. Part him is still lost in the back of his mind. If his mind wasn’t conflicted enough before, a part of him is now paralyzed and preventing him from opening up to the world. And deep down, he’s afraid of being stuck in the incomplete puzzle of his mind forever.

-Jeremy, remaining calm, looks around the five other hallways. He first looks into the darkness of the shorter hallway. He then looks around into the darkness of the four other hallways. This time, he picks one of the regular hallways and begins stepping forward.

-Cut to a random hallway. A Druid member, Robert, steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. Cut to another hallway and cut to Michael’s point of view as he breathes heavily and also approaches a rotunda. Robert reaches the end of the hallway. He steps out into the rotunda, and so does Michael. Before Robert can react, Michael immediately reaches for Robert’s throat (Clench!).

Robert: “Argh!”

-With both hands, Michael slams Robert against the wall (Thud!). Breathing heavily, he begins raising Robert all the way up with his outstretched arms.

Robert: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael raises Robert all the way up against the wall and stares Robert down with his dead-like eyes. And with both hands still on his throat, he begins strangling him (Clench! Clench! Crinch!)

Robert: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael continues strangling Robert (Clench! Clench! Crinch!).

Robert: “Argh! ARGH!”

-Michael tightens his grip on Robert’s throat (Clench! Clench! Crinch!).

Robert: “Argh! Argh!

-With his dead-like eyes looking right through Robert, Michael strangles him with no mercy (Clench! Clench! Crinch!).

Robert: “ARGH! Argh!”

-Suddenly, Wynn steps out of one of the hallways.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael!”

-With his hands still on Robert’s throat, Michael looks over at Wynn. Wynn faces Michael, then begins stepping forward.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael, please stop what you’re doing. You have every right to be upset with me. But please, don’t take it out on one of our own.”

-Wynn steps within three feet of Michael and stops. Michael looks on at Wynn, then back up at Robert. He then releases his right hand and turns around to face Wynn. With his left still on Robert’s throat, he faces Wynn and proceeds to finish the job (Clench! Clench! Clench! Crinch!).

Robert: “Argh! ARGH! Argh…Argh…”

-Robert loses it and his head sags over. His arms and legs also go limp. Michael lets go Robert’s lifeless body (Thud!) and he steps over to Wynn. Wynn wisely steps back. Both of them stop in their tracks in the middle of the rotunda and face each other. Wynn faces Michael. Michael faces Wynn. And Wynn begins speaking up.

Dr. Wynn: “I forgive you for murdering another one of our brothers. It might as well had been my hand strangling him. Because I am responsible. I am responsible for failing you. You lost your way because of me.”

-Michael continues facing Wynn.

Dr. Wynn: “I failed you a long time ago. Allowing Loomis to look over you was the first of my many mistakes. He was a dear friend and he wished to help you. I didn’t believe he would be able to help you, and he didn’t. But what I didn’t anticipate was him interfering in your destiny along the way. By 1995, I tried to turn the consequences of his actions around and fulfill your destiny. But clearly, there was nothing I could do at that point to make up for my mistakes. And I’m sorry. I really am.”

-Michael continues facing Wynn.

Dr. Wynn: “I had the opportunity to allow my daughter to reach out to you and point you back in the right direction. But I foolishly overturned the guidance she could have offered you and instead turned to the guidance of Hell. I apologize for leading you down here. But I felt it was necessary. As upset as you are with me right now, you must realize that I was looking out for you. Please, listen to what I have to say. It’s not too late. We can still fulfill your destiny. Both my daughter and I can still fulfill your destiny. Right down here in Hell. And you will finally be able to rest. You’ve earned it.”

-Michael continues facing Wynn. Wynn faces Michael. And then, Kara steps out of one of the nearest hallways. She bravely steps within three feet of them and speaks up.

Kara Strode: “Michael, you don’t have to listen to him anymore.”

-Michael turns his Halloween-masked head over to Kara.

Dr. Wynn: “What are you doing?”

Kara Strode: “Listening to him in the first place is what led you down here to Hell…”

Dr. Wynn: “Stop this…”

Kara Strode: “…Please, listen to another voice. A voice of reason. Deep down, I know you are listening. I know that Thorn is keeping you hidden deep inside to prevent your humanity from fighting back. Where ever you are in there, you must be afraid of all the darkness surrounding you. Well, you don’t have to be afraid it anymore. Because I forgive you. I forgive you for murdering my family…”

Dr. Wynn: “Stop what you are saying this instant…”

Kara Strode: “…I want you to know something. I don’t blame you at all for the deaths in my family and the deaths of all the others…”

-Kara turns to Wynn.

Kara Strode: “…I blame Wynn. He is responsible for leading you down a dark path and making a monster out of you…”

-Kara turns back to Michael.

Kara Strode: “…But you know what, I don’t see a monster in you at all. Because I recognize now that you have not been in control of your life since you were a child. How can I blame you? Deep down, you might be too weak to fight back, because you feel bad about all the death you have helped create. Well, you don’t have to feel that way anymore. Because you’re not responsible for Thorn’s actions. Thorn is. And so is Wynn.”

-Wynn looks on at Kara in disbelief, then over to Michael. Michael faces Kara and continues listening to her.

Kara Strode: “Michael, it’s time to fight back. Fight back for me. Fight back for me, Danny, Tommy and Stephen Lloyd. But more importantly, fight back for all those people who died by the hands of Thorn. Their deaths don’t have to be meaningless. If you fight back now, you can regain something Wynn has taken away from you for a long time. Your freedom. Take back your freedom and your life, and prevent our family’s deaths from meaning nothing.”

-Michael continues facing Kara. Kara faces Michael. Wynn turns to Kara, then over to Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “You’re not seriously considering what she had to say, are you? After everything I’ve done to look out for you?”

-Michael turns to Wynn, then back to Kara. As he does, a Druid member appears within the darkness of one of the nearest hallways. She, Carmela, appears from behind Kara and only Wynn can see her. Michael continues facing Kara. Kara bravely faces Michael. And suddenly, Carmela steps up behind Kara and holds her back.

Kara Strode: “Hey! Let me go! Let me go! Michael, don’t let them get away with this! Whatever you do, don’t let them get away with this!”

-Michael watches as Carmela takes hold of Kara. He then turns to Wynn.

Dr. Wynn: “It’s okay, Michael. She is no longer in control of you. You do not have to be afraid of her meaningless words. I am here for you. I have always been there for you. And no matter what you do to retaliate against my actions, you are not at fault. I am. Because I failed you. But that doesn’t mean it’s too late. All we have left to find now are the children. As well as Tommy. Once we find them, we will finally be able to fulfill your destiny. I know you want this as badly as I do.”

-Michael continues facing Wynn.

Dr. Wynn: “I am not going to order you around. You’re free to choose your next actions. All I can do is offer my guidance. What would you prefer to do, Michael? Come with us or go your own way?”

-Michael looks on at Wynn, then over to Kara. He turns back to Wynn, then steps back. He steps away from them and walks to the shorter hallway. He stops and looks back at Wynn and Kara one more time. He’s heard enough from both of them. He then steps on into the shorter hallway and disappears inside.

Dr. Wynn: “This is exactly what Michael needs. To think carefully about the path I am offering him and learn to trust me again. He’ll come around…”

-Wynn turns to Carmela.

Dr. Wynn: “…Let’s go. This way.”

-Wynn chooses a regular hallway and Carmela forces Kara to follow. As they disappear into the darkness of the hallway, the camera pans into the darkness of the shorter hallway. It pans into the darkness and the screen completely fades to black. Nothing can be seen within the darkness, but Michael’s heavy breathing is heard.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Michael stepping out of the shorter hallway and into the next rotunda. And standing within four of the regular hallways are Pinhead, the Female Cenobite, the Chatterer Cenobite and the Butterball Cenobite. Michael stops in his tracks and turns to each of them. Pinhead begins stepping forward, followed by the three other Cenobites. They step out into the rotunda and face Michael. Michael faces all four of them. Pinhead then speaks up.

Pinhead: “You may not know who we are, but we are well aware of who you are. You are Michael Myers. Or rather…Thorn. We are servants of Hell and we see to it that those who lose their way suffer for their actions. You are here, because foolish minds have opened Pandora’s Box in order for you to find your way back onto your rightful path. However…I have more ambitious ideas than that.”

-Michael continues facing Pinhead.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #16  
Old 06-29-2012, 11:21 PM
Helloween - Part 14

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Pinhead: “I am aware that their foolish minds have already tried reaching out to you, offering their own fruitless propositions. Allow me to offer you my own. Down here in Hell, we serve under Leviathan. Leviathan provides us with the necessary powers to watch over Hell and make an example out of every soul that finds their way here. You serve under the Celtic beliefs of the Druids. Representing Thorn, you are the darkest and most interesting of their beliefs. More importantly, you share common principles with us. You must understand, more than anyone, that some souls are destined to suffer. That they cannot escape fate. We share a similar belief. Some souls are born with tortured minds and are destined to find their way here. And that is where you come in.”

-Michael continues facing Pinhead.

Pinhead: “Instead of offering you the proper guidance to find your back into their direction, I would rather offer you the guidance to join us and serve under Leviathan. I have seen your passion and your intensity, and I could not be more impressed. Your handiwork, your drive…why, it is a beautiful sight to behold. You are utterly brutal when you make an example out of your victims and it is stimulating to witness…”

-The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatters away, while the Butterball Cenobite licks his lips.

Pinhead: “…I am offering you the opportunity to work alongside us, because we share the same passion and intensity in our work. Why, you would fit right in.”

-Michael continues facing Pinhead.

Pinhead: “However, I must be clear about something. Each of us were specifically designed to be pure in darkness. You have already been designed to be pure in darkness, and if you accept, you will not have to undergo any further alterations. Unless you wish to. Personally, I think you are perfect the way you are. Regardless, the choice is yours."

-Michael continues facing Pinhead. Pinhead, finished with his proposition, faces Michael. Michael then steps forward. Pinhead remains planted to the ground, while the Female Cenobite instinctively reaches for two hooks with curved blades (Shing! Shing!) and steps forward to protect Pinhead. Pinhead, however, stops her.

Pinhead: “That will not be necessary.”

-The Female Cenobite steps back, while Michael steps another foot towards Pinhead. He steps up to Pinhead and faces him. Pinhead faces Michael. Michael tilts his Halloween-masked head to the side. Pinhead gazes into the darkness of Michael’s dead-like eyes. And before he can get a closer look, Michael unexpectedly steps back. Pinhead sighs. Just as Thorn was beginning to offer a taste of its darkness, it pulls back.

Pinhead: “I’m disappointed. I was certain our offer would whet your appetite. But then again, we are interfering in your destiny, aren’t we? Well, don’t worry. No pressure from us. After all, before you can make that decision, you must finish off the foolish minds that led you here in the first place. If you are to cross from one sanctuary to another, you must burn bridges. So, go right ahead. Continue your work. You are doing a marvelous job so far. Just think about our offer. We have such sites to show you.”

-Pinhead and other Cenobites begin stepping back into darkness of the hallways they came from. They step back into the darkness and disappear within it. Michael stands his ground for a moment. He then looks around the five hallways. He picks one and begins stepping forward.

-Cut to a random hallway. Jeremy steps past two architectural posts and finds himself reaching the end of the hallway. However, this one doesn’t lead to an rotunda. What he sees at the end of this hallway is light. Jeremy’s eyes light up as he steps towards it. He can’t wait to find out what the light is hiding. However, he hopes the light doesn’t lead back to reality. He doesn’t want to go back, he’d rather explore Hell. Jeremy steps into the light and passes through it.

-Jeremy steps out of the hallway and finds himself on a platform. Below and above the platform is a dark blue sky. And above the platform is a giant figure of Pandora’s Box in the air. It is Leviathan, the source of Hell’s power. Jeremy can’t believe his eyes. It is beautiful…and it’s begging to be opened and solved. As Jeremy makes his way down the platform, the camera begins panning above him. It pans above him and platform. It pans far above the platform to reveal a far shot of the vast labyrinth that is Hell.

-Back down on the platform, Jeremy steps closer to Leviathan and stops. He looks all the way up at Leviathan, then pulls out the puzzle box. He looks down at the box, then back up at Leviathan. They are, indeed, the same thing. He turns his attention back to the box and turns to the side with larger circle in the middle. As he begins feeling out the circle with both thumbs, an electrical charge sparks from the box (Ccchhhkkkttt!).

-Back on the other side of the platform, Danny steps out of the hallway with Stephen. He steps out onto the platform and looks around the outside environment in disbelief.

Danny Strode: “Wow…”

-He looks up at Leviathan.

Danny Strode: “Holy crap…”

-He then looks down to see someone about his size further up the platform. It can only one other person - Jeremy!

Danny Strode: “Oh, no…”

-Danny turns to Stephen and shrugs.

Danny Strode: “Stephen, stay right here! I have to stop him!”

-Danny immediately begins running down the platform.

Danny Strode: “Jeremy, stop! Don’t open the box!”

-Jeremy continues teasing the circle on the puzzle box with both thumbs, and more electrical charges spark from it (Ccchhhkkkttt! Ccchhhkkkttt!).

Danny Strode: “Jeremy, stop! You don’t know what you’re doing!”

-Jeremy, only focusing on the puzzle box, presses one of his thumbs over the circle. Danny finally catches up to Jeremy. He runs in front of Jeremy and tries taking the box away from him. Jeremy, however, won’t let it go.

Jeremy Walker: “It’s mine!”

Danny Strode: “I know it is, but I don’t think it’s a good idea to open it again!”

Jeremy Walker: “I have to open it!”

Danny Strode: “No, you don’t!”

-As both of them play tug-of-war with the puzzle box, electrical charges spark from it (Ccchhhkkttt! Ccchhhkkkttt!). Jeremy can’t take anymore of the charges and falls back (Thud!). Upon feeling the charges, Danny also falls back (Thud!). The puzzle box falls to the platform (Cha-ching!) and one more electrical charge sparks from it (Ccchhhkkkttt!). Jeremy sits up and turns his attention to the box. He gets to his knees and starts reaching for it. Danny also sits up. Upon seeing Jeremy reaching for the box, he shrugs.

Danny Strode: “Jeremy, the box is yours! I don’t want it! Just don’t open it again! Not now!”

-Jeremy ignores Danny and takes hold of the puzzle box. Danny sighs of disbelief. What else can he do to stop him? He then gets to his knees. He gets up and directly faces Jeremy.

Danny Strode: “Jeremy, look at me!”

-Jeremy, seeing Danny in his face, finds himself forced to look Danny in the eye.

Danny Strode: “That’s right. Look at me. Not at the box. The box is yours. I don’t care about it. All I’m telling you is not to open it again. Not yet.”

Jeremy Walker: “But I have to open it.”

Danny Strode: “Why? Why do you have to open it now?”

-Jeremy looks up at Leviathan.

Jeremy Walker: “Because it’s right there…”

-Jeremy looks back down at Danny.

Jeremy Walker: “…It’s telling me to open it.”

Danny Strode: “I don’t think that’s a good idea.”

Jeremy Walker: “Why?”

Danny Strode: “Because you already opened the box once. And you wound up opening a doorway to here. I have a feeling that if you open it again now, you’ll close the doorway forever.”

Jeremy Walker: “I like being here.”

Danny Strode: “What? Why?”

Jeremy Walker: “It’s different. It’s like a jigsaw puzzle, only bigger. And darker.”

Danny Strode: “You’re right. It kind of is. But once you see all of it, it will become boring.”

Jeremy Walker: “I know what you mean…”

Danny Strode: “You do?”

Jeremy Walker: “I need more than one jigsaw puzzle. Once I solve one, I don’t know what to do with myself.”

Danny Strode: “And that is exactly why you don’t want to open the box again and close the doorway. Not until we’re back out. Even one place like this is too good to be true. There won’t be another one to visit.”

Jeremy Walker: “So, I shouldn’t open it?”

Danny Strode: “Not now. We’re still here, so you still have time to look around. There’s no need to open the box again. In case you do see all of it and get bored, you’ll want to get out through the doorway.”

Jeremy Walker: “Okay.”

Danny Strode: “Good. Now, let’s go back.”

-Danny and Jeremy get back up. They turn around and Danny immediately tenses up.

Danny Strode: “Oh, no…”

-Standing with Stephen at the other end of the platform are two Druid members – none other than Samantha and Bruce. They take hold of Stephen and begin walking back into the labyrinth.

Danny Strode: “They got Stephen Lloyd! We have to stop them! Come on!”

-Danny and Jeremy begin running down the platform.

-Cut to a random hallway. Melinda steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. She reaches the end of the hallway and steps out into the rotunda. And before she can decide with which way to next, the screen fades out.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Melinda as a child at home. It is the 1970’s and she is playing board games with her mother. Notably, her father is absent. She turns to her mother questionably.

Melinda Wynn: “Where’s Daddy?”

Mrs. Wynn: “He’s conducting business, honey. He has an important job.”

Melinda Wynn: “What does he do? Why does it keep him away?”

-Her mother turns to her for a moment looking for the right answer. The real answer – that her husband devotes more of his time to the cult and Smith’s Grove than his family – is not very appropriate for Melinda to hear.
Mrs. Wynn: “Because he helps people. And a lot of people count on him. When you do get to see him, you should treasure every moment.”

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal the front of a four-story, scholarly-looking building. A sign in front of it reads: Smith’s Grove Warren County Sanitarium. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal an underground basement lair where a ceremony is taking place. Gathered in a group are Druid members in robes and hoods. Lit around them are candles. And leading the ceremony with inspiring words is Dr. Wynn.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Melinda’s mother on her death bed. It is the 1990’s and Mrs. Wynn is dying of cancer. Melinda is in tears. Dr. Wynn is just as upset and is sitting by his ailing wife. He leans in, so she can quietly send him a message.

Mrs. Wynn: “You missed out on a lot of valuable time with your daughter. When I’m gone, I expect you to be there for her. And to support her when she needs it.”

Dr. Wynn: “I promise, I’ll be there for her from now on.”

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Smith’s Grove where another ceremony is being led by Dr. Wynn. It is later on in the 1990’s and among the Druid members listening to his inspiring words is Melinda. After passing all her studies, she is now a Druid member.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Melinda at her family home. It is later on in the 1990’s and she is at a dresser looking at family photos. There are photos of Dr. Wynn and Mrs. Wynn from the 1960’s, as well as photos of Dr. Wynn, Mrs. Wynn and herself ranging from the 1970’s to the 1990’s. She looks on all the photos for a moment. After seeing very little of her father for much of her childhood, he’s finally there for her. Or is he?

-Melinda takes another look and she is no longer in any of the photos. Neither is her mother. They are now photos of Dr. Wynn and Michael Myers, ranging from the 1960’s to the 1990’s. They specifically feature Michael from age six and unmasked to an adult wearing the Halloween mask. Michael might as well be a son to him.

-Deep down, she has always felt that her father was more devoted to Michael and the cult than his family. It didn’t help that he passed her over in favor of Dr. Loomis when it came time for him to step down as cult leader. It also doesn’t help that he has just sabotaged her leadership and opened Pandora’s Box in order to reach out to Michael. In her own mind, he doesn’t believe in the guidance she can offer Thorn.

-Melinda sighs of frustration and knocks one of the photos from the dresser (Smash!). She knocks another photo over (Smash!) and proceeds to knock the rest of them from the dresser (Smash! Smash! Smash!). As she does, cut to the point of view of Michael as he approaches Melinda from behind.

-As Melinda is about to knock another photo from the dresser, she suddenly sees Michael’s reflection in the glass. She turns around and Michael steps onto the broken glass on the floor (Smash! Cha-ching!). He faces her, breathing heavily and staring her down with his dead-like eyes. He then raises his kitchen knife and swings it back (Swish!). As he swings it forward, the screen fades out.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Melinda back in the rotunda. She has just experienced her own personal Hell. And it wasn’t pleasant. She tenses up and looks around the five other hallways. She first looks over at the four other regular ones, then over to the shorter one. Which way will she go next?

-Suddenly, before she can make a choice, a figure steps out of the darkness of one of the regular hallways. It is Michael and he steps out of the hallway. He steps into the rotunda and toward Melinda. At first, Melinda is startled. And then, she remembers what she had been waiting to do for a very long time. She stands her ground and bravely speaks up.

Melinda Wynn: “Michael.”

-Michael stops in his tracks and faces Melinda. Melinda faces Michael. And then, she begins speaking up.

Melinda Wynn: “Michael, I don’t know where to start. First, I apologize on behalf of my father…”

-Suddenly, Michael suddenly reaches for her throat (Clench!).

Melinda Wynn: “Argh!”

-With his left hand, Michael slams Melinda against the wall (Thud!).

Melinda Wynn: “Argh! Michael! Argh!”

-With his right hand, he pulls out his kitchen knife (Shi-i-i-i-ing). Melinda can’t believe what’s happening. It’s her own personal Hell coming true. Unfortunately for her, Michael has already listened to her father, Kara and Pinhead. At this point, Michael must be sick and tired of hearing speeches. If she was the first person to try reaching out to Michael, he might have listened her.

Melinda Wynn: “Michael! Argh! Listen to me! You don’t want to do this! Argh!”

-Michael breathes heavily and stares Melinda down with his dead-like eyes. He then swings the knife back (Swish!) and Melinda tenses up. Suddenly, that’s when Tommy steps out of the darkness of the far right hallway. He sees Melinda in danger and doesn’t think twice. Knowing the black magic spell from memory, he immediately begins stepping forward and prevails.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael! Feel the power of Thorn! Allow it to flow through your body! Allow it flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel!...”

-Michael looks back, then steps away from Melinda. As Tommy steps on into the rotunda and walks over to them, Michael begins stepping back into the nearest hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “…Thorn believes in you, Michael! It wishes to free you of your torment! Don’t listen to the torment!...”

-Tommy steps over to Melinda and watches as Michael steps back toward the darkness of the hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen to Thorn! Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body!…”

-Michael steps back into the darkness and begins disappearing within it.

Tommy Doyle: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo! Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your…”

-Michael disappears within the darkness and Tommy stops chanting. By now, Michael is out of reach for him to finish the spell. What matters is that Tommy prevented a senseless murder. He turns to Melinda and sighs of disbelief. Melinda, however, sighs of relief.

Melinda Wynn: “You saved me…”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, I did…”

Melinda Wynn: “You saved my life…after we…”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah, exactly. Because I don’t believe in Celtic beliefs. And I also don’t believe in murder.”

Melinda Wynn: “You still saved my life…”

-Melinda turns to hug Tommy, but he resists.

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, I did. Now, get away from me…”

Melinda Wynn: “Are you that repulsed by me?”

Tommy Doyle: “No. I’m repulsed by what you believe in.”

-Suddenly, another Druid member steps out of one of the regular hallways. He, Lucius, steps up behind Tommy and holds him back.

Tommy Doyle: “Hey!”

Melinda Wynn: “Let him go.”

Lucius: “What?”

Melinda Wynn: “I said, let him go. He isn’t a threat. This place is.”

-Lucius reluctantly lets go of Tommy.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #17  
Old 06-29-2012, 11:30 PM
Helloween - Part 15

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Lucius: “You might be right about that. But I would suggest keeping a close eye on him.”

Melinda Wynn: “After you sabotaged me, I should be keeping a close eye on you.”

-Lucius sighs.

Lucius: “You couldn’t be more right. Siding with your father was wrong. Agreeing to deprive you of your chance to guide Thorn at all was wrong. I can’t let him accept all the responsibility for defying Thorn again. I’m responsible for my own actions. And if my word still means anything to you, I’m sorry.”

Melinda Wynn: “I forgive you.”

-Melinda and Lucius begin looking around the rotunda, when Tommy points into the shorter hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “Let’s try this way. They seem to be shortcuts between the longer hallways. For all we know, they could be the key to finding our way back.”

Melinda Wynn: “You think so?”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t know, but it’s a thought. I could have traveled through each and every hallway a million times by now.”

Melinda Wynn: “I know what you mean. But are you sure you want us to come with you?”

Tommy Doyle: “At this point, it doesn’t matter. This isn’t about running away from Thorn anymore. It’s about finding the others and finding our way back into the real world. You were against your father opening Pandora’s Box as much as I was…”

-Tommy turns to Lucius.

Tommy Doyle: “…And you just admitted that agreeing to sabotage Melinda was wrong. Right?”

Lucius: “Right.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, I have a feeling that you’re not only one who might feel the same way. If we find the others, and they are no longer listening to her father’s guidance, we might be able to find our way back with fewer problems.”

Melinda Wynn: “You might be right. We might be able to get out of here after all.”

Tommy Doyle: “Exactly. So, let’s go.”

-Tommy steps on into the shorter hallway, and Melinda and Lucius follow.

-Cut to a random hallway. Danny and Jeremy run down in search of Stephen. Jeremy, finding himself forced to keep up, turns to Danny questionably.

Jeremy Walker: “Why the rush?”

Danny Strode: “Because they took Stephen Lloyd. We have to stop them.”

Jeremy Walker: “But why? They’re nice.”

Danny Strode: “No, they’re not. The people who brought you here are trying to kill us. You can’t trust them.”

Jeremy Walker: “But they’ve been helping me.”

Danny Strode: “They’re not helping you, they’re using you. They used you to open the doorway to Hell. And now, we’re in it.”

-Jeremy shrugs. It is only now that his unfocused mind is understanding this.

Jeremy Walker: “Where??”

-Cut to a random hallway. As Tommy leads Melinda and Lucius past two architectural posts, Melinda turns to him.

Melinda Wynn: “How did you do that?”

Tommy Doyle: “Do what?”

Melinda Wynn: “Come up with that spell?”

Tommy Doyle: “The one I used to scare Michael off with? I learned about your beliefs and improvised.”

-Lucius turns to Tommy in a suspicious manner. Will this be a problem later on?

Melinda Wynn: “I’m not surprised. That is exactly why we could use you. For your resourcefulness.”

Tommy Doyle: “No, thank you.”

-They continue walking down the hallway and Melinda speaks up again.

Melinda Wynn: “I want to clarify something with you.”

-Tommy sarcastically speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Please, go on…”

Melinda Wynn: “If you have truly studied our beliefs, you would know that Thorn is just one of many beliefs we follow. We don’t just celebrate the darkness of Thorn, we also celebrate the feelings of joy, love and happiness. And especially love…”

-Lucius turns to Melinda in a questionable manner. Does she have her feelings in check?

Melinda Wynn: “…We celebrate all the traditional beliefs followed by other faiths. We just celebrate them differently. All in all, I consider it a beautiful faith.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, a faith that believes in murder.”

Melinda Wynn: “Do you really want to know why we follow Thorn? And what it means to us?”

Tommy Doyle: “As matter of fact, I would. I’m sure I won’t believe a word of it, but go ahead and tell me. I’m all ears.”

Melinda Wynn: “Everyone lives in darkness. It’s everywhere. Most faiths try to deny it, and inevitably, the darkness creates problems. However, we won’t deny it. We know that we are surrounded by darkness. And we believe that, in order to prevent problems, we can control the darkness. Consider it thinning down the numbers. As long as a thing such as darkness exists, it might as well serve a purpose.”

Tommy Doyle: “You can’t bargain with evil.”

Melinda Wynn: “Believe me, I am well aware of that. There will always be problems in every society. But you can please the darkness, so that it doesn’t create more problems than necessary. We’ve been doing that for hundreds of years. Sometimes, a leadership will run into problems. Like my father’s did. But we try to control the darkness, so that we can control our quality of life. That’s all we’re really doing.”

-They continue walking down the hallway and Tommy remains quiet.

Melinda Wynn: “Well?”

-Tommy turns to Melinda for a moment, then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Okay, I have a question.”

Melinda Wynn: “Please. Ask away. Ask all the questions you want.”

Tommy Doyle: “You apparently celebrate feelings of love and happiness, and yet you act so cold towards Kara and Danny. What does that say about you?”

Melinda Wynn: “That we have to stay firm to our beliefs. Even to Thorn. If we become emotionally involved with the victims, we won’t be able to live up to our duties.”

Tommy Doyle: “Exactly. You become the darkness. You become the evil you are trying to control.”

Melinda Wynn: “Maybe to you. But to us, we are being strong-minded. Those who are weak-minded are the ones who are unable to accept their duties.”

Tommy Doyle: “You know what, I get it. I finally get it now. At the end of the day, it’s not even about Thorn and thinning down the numbers. It’s really about control. Control over people’s lives, and control over their feelings.”

Melinda Wynn: “No, it isn’t.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, it is. You just confirmed it to me. You just don’t realize it, because your life has always been controlled by your father.”

Lucius: “Hey, that’s enough.”

-They begin approaching the end of the hallway.

Melinda Wynn: “Lucius, it’s all right. As long as he has the welcome opportunity to join our side, he has the right to know. Even if he doesn’t understand it at first.”

Lucius: “Well, I think he’s trouble.”

Melinda Wynn: “Maybe he is, but you are not helping. If he’s going to show interest in joining us at all, you must be more tolerant.”

Lucius: “Tolerant? Clearly, this isn’t about me. It’s about you. You’re infatuated with him. You’re emotionally involved.”

-They step out of the hallway and into a rotunda. As they do, Melinda stops and faces Lucius.

Melinda Wynn: “I won’t deny that I’m interested in Tommy. But I’m not risking my leadership over it. I am in control of my feelings. And if I have to sacrifice him along with the others, I will.”

-Lucius faces Melinda and prevails.

Lucius: “I’d like to see that.”

-Suddenly, Michael steps out of the darkness of the nearest hallway behind Lucius. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing, and both Tommy and Melinda tense up.

Lucius: “What is it?”

-Lucius turns to them oddly, then looks behind him. What he sees is Michael stepping up to him. Lucius tries to get away, but Michael reaches over for his shoulder (Clench!).

Lucius: “Argh!”

-With his left outstretched arm, Michael pulls Lucius over to him. And with his right hand, he slices his knife across his throat (Shi-i-i-i-ing! Spla-a-a-a-ater!).

Lucius: “A-a-a-argh!…”

-Lucius loses it and Michael lets go of his body (Thud!). Michael steps out into the rotunda, and Tommy and Melinda step back. Tommy then turns to Melinda and shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “Let’s go! Now!”

-Tommy and Melinda turn around and run for the nearest hallway. They run into the shorter hallway and disappear inside. Michael breathes heavily and steps towards it. Tommy and Melinda run out of the other end of the shorter hallway and into the next rotunda. They stop and look around the five hallways to enter. They then shrug.

Tommy Doyle: “I have to try the spell on him!”

Melinda Wynn: “No, you can’t! I have to try reaching out to him!”

Tommy Doyle: “What?”

-Melinda, seeing that Tommy is really not on her side, turns to him for a moment. She then speaks up.

Melinda Wynn: “It doesn’t have to be like this.”

Tommy Doyle: “What are you talking about?”

Melinda Wynn: “Look at me and put aside my faith for a second. Do you really see us having no future together?”

-Tommy, finding himself on the spot, looks on for a moment.

Melinda Wynn: “Tell me!”

Tommy Doyle: “No. You’re an attractive woman, but my heart belongs to Kara. If that means suffering for her love, so be it.”

-Melinda looks on at Tommy in disbelief. As it turns out, she is really not in control of her feelings after all. That’s when Michael steps out of the darkness within the shorter hallway. Tommy shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “Melinda!”

-Before Melinda can react, Michael steps up behind her and stabs the knife in the back (Shing! Splatter!). The suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in a notch.

Melinda Wynn: “Argh!”

Tommy Doyle: “Melinda!”

-With the knife still in place, Michael begins lifting Kara up into the air.

Melinda Wynn: “Argh! ARGH!”

-Michael lifts Melinda all the way up with his outstretched arm.

Melinda Wynn: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael looks up at Melinda, then back down at Tommy. Tommy then shrugs and begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn! Allow it to flow through your body! Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel!...”

-Michael bravely faces Tommy and Melinda continues to suffer by his hand.

Melinda Wynn: “ARGH! Argh!”

Tommy Doyle: “…Thorn believes in you, Michael! It wishes to free you of your torment! Don’t listen to the torment! Listen to Thorn! Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body!...”

-Michael continues facing Tommy.

Melinda Wynn: “Argh! ARGH!”

Tommy Doyle: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo! Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body…”

-Melinda, after suffering enough from Michael’s hand, begins losing it.

Melinda Wynn: “Argh…Argh…”

-As she does, Tommy sighs.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow it to, uh, flow through your blood stream and every, um, blood vessel…”

-Melinda finally loses it and dies.

Melinda Wynn: “…Argh…”

-Her head sags over, and her arms and legs go limp. Michael faces Tommy with Melinda’s lifeless body still in the air, and Tommy stops chanting for a second. He then shrugs and continues where he left off.

Tommy Doyle: “…Wunjo also believes in you, Michael! It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment!...”

-Michael forces Melinda’s body against the wall and off his knife (Thud!).

Tommy Doyle: “...Continue listening to Thorn! Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer! Allow yourself to become consumed by it!...”

-Michael calmly begins stepping back into the darkness of the shorter hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “…And continue listening to Wunjo! Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul!...”

-Michael begins disappearing into the darkness of the hallway. Tommy runs up to it and continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn! Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and…”

-Tommy looks around the shorter hallway and finds himself alone. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins toning down. As if by miracle, Michael has vanished within the darkness. Perhaps it is a dark miracle from Pinhead. As Tommy gets down to his knees and tries to help Melinda, the camera begins panning away.

Tommy Doyle: “No! No! Not like this!”

-The camera pans further away and into the middle hallway as Tommy finds himself in anguish over the murder of a Druid member…and also a Wynn. In his mind, it is still murder. As the camera continues panning away down the hallway, Pinhead is heard rejoicing.

Pinhead: “Ah, the suffering. The sweet suffering…”

-Cut to a random hallway. Wynn leads Kara and Carmela past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. Cut another hallway and cut to Michael’s point of view as he breathes heavily and steps past two architectural posts. Wynn reaches the end of the hallway and steps into the rotunda. Carmela continues forcing Kara to follow. As Wynn begins looking around the rotunda, the screen fades out.

-The screen fades back in to reveal a dark setting lit by candles. Present in the middle of the dark setting is an alter. Standing before the alter are Druid members dressed in robes and hoods. And standing behind the alter is the leader of the Druid cult. The date “October 1963” appears. The Druid leader displays no mistakable features. Also dressed in a black robe, his/her hood looks from his/her left and right at all the members. Finally, he speaks up. And what is heard is a deep voice. Seemingly the deep voice of an older, aging man.

Druid Leader: “Samhain is now upon us and showing itself in the stars is Thorn. Thorn now lives in on the growing body of a child, and it is telling us that it is ready to begin its journey.”

-The Druid member looks on at the all members for a moment, then continues.

Druid Leader: “I must also announce that as Thorn begins its new journey, mine ends tonight. Thorn, and each of the associated Runes, have decided that is time for me to hand over my reigns as cult leader. As Thorn begins its new journey, and as I have served many fruitful years, it couldn’t be more fitting. This is the beginning of a new era. For Thorn…”

-The Druid leader looks back towards a new member in the darkness behind him. The Druid leader steps aside, allowing the new member to step up to the alter. The new member is appropriately dressed in a black overcoat, a black hat and black, silver-tipped boots. As the new member steps up to the alter and is seen by all the other members, the Druid leader continues.

Druid Leader: “And for Dr. Terence Wynn, the recently assigned Chief Administrator of Smith’s Grove Warren County Sanitarium.”

-Dr. Wynn turns to the Druid leader, then to all the other members.

Dr. Wynn: “Thank you. I welcome this opportunity with open arms. Indeed, Samhain is upon us, and Thorn could not be more anxious to begin its journey. Once Thorn has taken its first step, it will have welcome accommodations at Smith’s Grove, where all of us will gather for future congregations to come…”

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal the home of the Wynn’s. It is the 1970’s, and Dr. Wynn’s wife and daughter are in the living room playing board games.

Melinda Wynn: “I want Daddy to play with us.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-30-2012 at 05:35 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #18  
Old 06-29-2012, 11:38 PM
Helloween - Part 16

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Mrs. Wynn: “I know you do, honey, but there are a lot of people who need him right now.”

Melinda Wynn: “I need him.”

-Mrs. Wynn looks on and sighs, not knowing what else to tell her. Ever since her husband began working for Smith’s Grove and leading the cult, he has spent less time with his family. Just as their friend of the family, Sam Loomis, has become obsessed with looking over Michael Myers, her husband has become obsessed with watching over him.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal the front of a four-story, scholarly-looking building. A sign in front of it reads: Smith’s Grove Warren County Sanitarium. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal an underground basement lair where a ceremony is taking place. Gathered in a group are Druid members in robes and hoods. Lit around them are candles. And leading the ceremony with inspiring words is Dr. Wynn.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Melinda’s mother on her death bed. It is the 1990’s and Mrs. Wynn is dying of cancer. Melinda is in tears. Dr. Wynn is just as upset and is sitting by his ailing wife. He leans in, so she can quietly send him a message.

Mrs. Wynn: “You missed out on a lot of valuable time with your daughter. When I’m gone, I expect you to be there for her. And to support her when she needs it.”

Dr. Wynn: “I promise, I’ll be there for her from now on.”

Mrs. Wynn: “I’ll hold you to that. When we see each other again in our afterlives, I’ll know.”

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Smith’s Grove where another ceremony is being led by Dr. Wynn. It is later on in the 1990’s and among the Druid members listening to his inspiring words is Melinda. After passing all her studies, she is now a Druid member.

-As Wynn continues leading the ceremony, the candles burn out and he finds himself alone in complete darkness. He stops what he’s doing and looks around the darkness. And Melinda momentarily appears before him. She steps up to the alter and faces her father. Wynn faces his daughter. And she begins speaking up.

Melinda Wynn: “You failed me. You failed as a father and were never there for me. You were only there for Thorn.”

-Wynn looks away in disbelief. He would rather not hear, or face, this truth.
Melinda Wynn: “In doing so, you were also not there for Thorn. You failed to guide Thorn and fulfill its destiny. You failed both of us. You…are a failure.”

-Wynn continues looking away in disbelief. This is too overwhelming to bear. That’s when another figure steps out of the darkness. It is Michael. He steps up to the alter and Melinda turns to him. Michael turns to Melinda. Melinda then turns back to Wynn and faces him.

Melinda Wynn: “Because of your failure to be there for me and guide Thorn, I am destined to suffer.”

-Michael suddenly pulls out his kitchen knife (Swish!). Without thinking twice, he stabs Melinda in the chest (Shing! Splatter!). Melinda takes the attack with stride and calmly continues speaking up.

Melinda Wynn: “I am destined to suffer, because of your mistakes.”

-Michael stabs Melinda again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Melinda Wynn: “I am destined to suffer, because of your miscalculations.”

-Michael stabs Melinda once more (Shing! Splatter!).

Melinda Wynn: “I am destined to suffer, because of your sins.”

-Michael stabs Melinda once again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Melinda Wynn: “I am destined to suffer, because of your unwillingness to accept change.”

-Michael continues stabbing Melinda (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!). Melinda takes the on-going attack and calmly faces her father the entire time. Wynn looks on in disbelief. This cannot be true. He looks away, unable to face what is happening. That’s when the screen begins fading out.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Wynn walking in darkness. This is now his afterlife. He continues walking through the darkness until he makes out bright light up ahead. He sighs of relief and begins making his ways towards it. As he does, a figure begins stepping out of the light.

-Wynn steps up to the light and the figure steps out of it. It is, none other than, his late wife. He steps up to her and sighs of relief. They have finally been reunited after so long. Mrs. Wynn looks on and faces her husband. Dr. Wynn faces his wife. And then, she begins speaking up.

Mrs. Wynn: “You failed to be there for our daughter. Even after my passing.”

-Wynn looks on in disbelief. Even after death, he can’t catch a break.

Mrs. Wynn: “You weren’t there for Melinda. And as a result, she died a premature death. As much as I was against her following in your footsteps, her destiny was to take over as cult leader and make up for your sins. To give respect back to our name. You failed on both counts. You failed on every count and you don’t belong here.”

-Mrs. Wynn steps back into the bright light. She disappears within it and Wynn finds himself alone. He steps forward, but only finds more darkness. He steps back and finds more darkness. He steps around in circles and finds himself lost in the darkness. As the bright light fades away, the screen slowly fades to black and Wynn is forever lost in limbo.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Wynn, Kara and Carmela in the rotunda. Wynn has just experienced his own personal Hell. And it was unsettling. Perhaps this is why he has a death wish, and is willing to accept responsibility for opening Pandora’s Box. Carmela turns to Wynn questionably.

Carmela: “What’s the matter?”

Kara Strode: “You saw a vision, didn’t you? Of your own personal Hell.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes, I did. And it was rather disturbing.”

Kara Strode: “I’m happy to hear that. After everything you’ve done to harm my family, it should be disturbing.”

Carmela: “Hey, one more word from you and…”

Dr. Wynn: “Never mind her. Let’s continue. This way.”

-Wynn begins leading them into another regular hallway. Suddenly, Michael steps out of the darkness of a nearby hallway. Upon seeing the three of them in the rotunda, he specifically sets his sights on Wynn and pulls out his knife (Shing!). Wynn sees Michael coming for him and tenses up.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael…”

-Carmela immediately lets go of Kara and instinctively steps forward to protect Wynn.

Carmela: “Michael, you must not harm him! Or any of us!...”

-Michael stops within three foot of them and turns to Carmela.

Carmela: “…We are only trying to help you! All we wish is for you to fulfill your destiny and rest!...”

-Carmela bravely steps up to Michael.

Carmela: “…Please, Michael, put aside your anger and focus on your destiny. It’s not too late. You don’t have to forgive us or Dr. Wynn. You have every right to be upset with us. But listen to the darkness. Listen to what it expects of you. Part of it may wish for retribution. But another part of it must also wish to finally rest after so long. Consider what the darkness really wants.”

-Michael faces Carmela. Carmela bravely faces Michael. Michael turns to Wynn. He then turns back to Carmela and begins stabbing her in the chest (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Splatter!).

Carmela: “Argh! ARGH! Argh!”

Kara Strode: “Oh, God!”

-Kara turns around and runs off into the nearest hallway.

Dr. Wynn: “Carmela! Nooo! Michael, stop what you’re doing this instant!”

-Michael, however, proceeds to stab Carmela to death (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Carmela: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-Wynn turns around and sees Kara running off.

Dr. Wynn: “Hey, come back here at once!”

-Wynn turns back to Michael as he finishes the job (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Splatter!).

Carmela: “Argh! ARGH!…Argh…”

-Carmela loses it and falls back (Thud!). Michael steps around her body and faces Wynn. Wynn faces Michael. He then begins speaking up.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael…”

-Michael immediately begins stepping forward, and Wynn is forced to begin stepping back.

Dr. Wynn: “…I once again forgive you for murdering one of our own. You are not responsible, I am. I am responsible for your downfall, and I accept sole responsibility. So, if you feel compelled to murder one more of your own, make it me. Make me the final victim in your revenge. Make me deservedly suffer for my actions. Let the others live and allow my daughter to guide you to your destiny.”

-Wynn bravely stops in his tracks and faces Michael. Michael also stops and faces Wynn. He faces him for a moment, and then begins stepping back. Wynn sighs of disbelief. This is not what he wants. And clearly, this is not what Thorn wants. As long as Wynn has this apparent death wish, Thorn would prefer to save him for last.

-Michael continues stepping back and then turns around. He turns around and steps over toward the shorter hallway. As Wynn watches Michael disappear into the darkness of the hallway, he sighs of frustration.

Dr. Wynn: “What is it that you want, Michael? If not my blood, what are you asking of me? What are you asking of all of us? What will it take to please you and fulfill your destiny?”

-Michael vanishes into the darkness and Wynn finds himself alone. He sighs.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael…”

-As Wynn begins stepping into the nearest hallway, the camera pans into the darkness of the shorter hallway. It pans into the darkness and the screen completely fades to black. For a moment, all Michael can hear is his heavy breathing. And then, he begins hearing mysterious voices.

Woman: “Michael…”

Man: “Michael…”

-Michael continues walking through the hallway and he hears the voices again.

Woman: “Michael, come here…”

Man: “Michael, come on out and play…”

Girl: “I found you, Michael! Come on outside!...”

-The screen fades back in to reveal Michael stepping out of the shorter hallway. He steps out of the darkness and into a dimly lit room. Inside the room is a mirror reflecting the point of view of a child playing with his mother, father and teenage sister in a backyard. The mother is noticeably holding a child within two years of age.

-Michael steps into the middle of the room and stops. He faces the mirror and doesn’t know what to make of what he’s seeing. What he is actually seeing is the point of view of his former self before Thorn took possession of his body. Reflected in the mirror are his parents, his sister Judith, as well as his other sister Laurie. The reflection in the mirror fades out and Michael finds himself alone. But not for long.

-Within the surrounding darkness, Pinhead appears. The female Cenobite, Chatterer Cenobite and Butterball Cenobite also appear, one after another, and they surround Michael from all four corners of the room. The dreary undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme begin picking up as all four of them step out of the darkness. They step out of the darkness and into the middle of the room. Each one of them steps within several feet of Michael and stops in their tracks. Just as the dark “Hellraiser” theme is about to play on, it tones down and Pinhead speaks up.

Pinhead: “I regret haunting you with voices from the past. But the fact remains that lying inside of you is an imperfection that makes you weak. Buried deep within you are human feelings, and they are preventing you from reaching the peak of your powers.”

-Pinhead faces Michael. Michael faces Pinhead. He then steps forward. As soon as he does, the Female Cenobite instinctively reaches for hooks with curved blades (Shing! Shing!) and steps forward to protect Pinhead. Pinhead immediately turns to the Female Cenobite in a stern manner, and she reluctantly steps back. He then turns his attention back to Michael. Michael steps another foot towards him. He then stops and faces Pinhead.

Pinhead: “Forgive me, once again, for interrupting you in the middle of your work. Your performance so far is splendid. However, upon further examination, it is evident that foolish minds have proven capable of making you think twice about your actions. My concern is that they are a contribution to the path you have gotten yourself lost on. Allow me to do something about that.”

-Michael continues facing Pinhead.

Pinhead: “Please, face the mirror. Do not worry, there is still no pressure from us to make a decision to our proposal. Whether you stick to your sanctuary or join us is up to you. I am merely guiding you, so that we can prevent foolish minds from meddling with you during the rest of your stay. However long it lasts. So, please, face the mirror. Allow me to examine the darkness within you and make you stronger.”

-Michael faces Pinhead for a moment. Pinhead faces Michael. Michael then steps back and faces the mirror. It is a large mirror spread out from one end of the far wall to the other end. Pinhead and the other Cenobites turn around and also face the mirror. At first, none of their reflections appear. And then, Michael’s does.

-Michael’s reflection appears in the middle of the mirror. At first, Michael glances at it. And then, he looks down and turns his Halloween-masked head around questionably. What is the point of this? As a result, his reflection looks down and his reflected head looks around in a questionable manner.

-Suddenly, Michael’s reflection goes against his actions and looks back at himself. Michael finds his reflection following different actions and he looks on into the mirror oddly. His reflection, on the other hand, appears to be staring himself down. And then, his reflection appears to be tilting its head to the side.

Pinhead: “Now you know how that feels, don’t you? Your mannerisms, before acting on your instincts, are nothing short of menacing. It only requires a small effort on your part to strike fear into anyone. And I admire that. Now, let’s dig deeper and find out what really goes on inside of you.”

-Within the mirror, the camera begins closing in on Michael’s reflection. It pans all the way in on his reflected head. The camera then stays put and now showing in the mirror is one of his dead-like eyes. All that is seen is one of the eye holes of the mask and the darkness it is hiding underneath.

Pinhead: “Before us now is the window to your mind. A rather dark one that shows no color. But every window has something to hide. So must yours. Let’s find out what that is.”

-Within the mirror, the camera pans into the eye hole and into the darkness behind it. At first, there’s just darkness. And then, there’s more darkness. All it appears to be is darkness. And then, something finally appears. It is a six year old boy with blonde hair. Standing within the darkness is the child Michael once was before Thorn took possession. And he looks frightened.

Pinhead: “There it is. There is your single weakness. That is the reason foolish minds have stopped you in your tracks. It is what’s left of your human side, and it is the only thing holding you back. Well, it does not have to remain that way. The darkness I am seeing now is gloriously pure and empty. It is a shame that your human side is there to get in the way.”

-Michael looks on at the reflection of his mind. He then turns around and looks over at Pinhead in a questionable manner.

Pinhead: “I will be upfront with you. If you join our side, I will be interested in studying you and all the emptiness Thorn has to offer. The emptiness I am seeing now is just a taste of what is there. I know there is much more to be found, and I look forward to discovering how deep it goes. What I am asking of you is your permission to study the darkness of Thorn. I promise, it will not be unpleasant in any way. Unless you wish it to be. In return, you will be free to make an example out of the many souls that find their way here and insure that they suffer for their actions.”

-Michael faces Pinhead for a moment. He then turns his attention back to the reflection of his mind in the mirror.

Pinhead: “You don’t have to decide now. You still have time to think it over. In the meantime, before you continue your work, allow me to help you suppress those human feelings in the back of your mind. With it out of the way…”

-Suddenly, Michael steps over to the mirror and smashes it with both hands (Smash! Crunch! Cha-ching!). He smashes the middle section of the mirror, and the power of Thorn causes the remainder of the mirror to smash into pieces (Sma-a-a-a-ash! Cru-u-u-u-unch! Cha-a-achi-i-i-i-ing!).

-Michael has heard enough from Pinhead. He was willing to hear Pinhead out again, but this is not what he wants. He’s not even sure what he wants. As much as Thorn wishes to fulfill its destiny and finally rest, it is still very bitter with Wynn. Being torn between destiny and Wynn is enough. Pinhead is just one extra obstacle pulling him in another direction.

-Michael steps back from the shattered mirror, turns around and faces Pinhead. The Female Cenobite instinctively reaches for her hooks with curved blades (Shing! Shing!) and steps forward to protect Pinhead. This time, so does the Chatterer Cenobite and the Butterball Cenobite with their own hooks (Shing! Shing! Shing! Shing!).

-With hooks in each of the three Cenobites’ hands, they face Michael. Michael faces them. He then turns to Pinhead one more time, and starts walking away. He walks over to the hallway he entered in and disappears within its darkness. The three Cenobites lower their hooks and Pinhead speaks up.

Pinhead: “The poor devil. He is so conflicted, that he does not know what he wants. I have tried to be nice, but perhaps I have to take extra measures to get on his good side.”

Female Cenobite: “What good side? He clearly wants nothing to do with us.”

Pinhead: “His lack of heart is so pure, that I cannot imagine him not wanting to be here. Clearly, he is enraged by the doctor who misused him all these years. If I am going to make him see things our way, I will have to speed up the process…”

-Pinhead turns to the three other Cenobites.

Pinhead: “…There is still much blood and suffering to be had. We must join him on his crusade and give him a helping hand. But only the remaining souls who foolishly believed in the doctor. Save the others for last. After all, in order for Thorn to join us, it will have to burn bridges and denounce its own faith first.”

-The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatter away, while the Butterball Cenobite licks his lips at the thought of taking part in this suffering.

Female Cenobite: “I don’t agree with you about Thorn, but I do look forward to this suffering you speak up.”

TO BE CONTINUED SOON...

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-30-2012 at 05:41 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #19  
Old 06-29-2012, 11:47 PM
It is just past midnight in the early hours of Saturday. I planned on posting more than this and I wanted to get the next large chunk out of the way. Well, the early warnings of a storm is stirring all around me and I think I should stop at this point. To be continued soon.
Reply With Quote
  #20  
Old 06-30-2012, 05:49 PM
Helloween - Part 17

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to the rotunda at the other end of the shorter hallway. The understated “Hellraiser” theme begins playing and the camera faces the middle hallway. Michael’s heavy breathing is momentarily heard. He then steps into view and past the camera. As Michael begins stepping into the middle hallway, the camera stays put in the rotunda.

-Michael steps into the middle hallway and begins stepping into the darkness within it. The hunt is still on. Five Druid members, as well as Melinda Wynn, are down. Seven remaining Druid members, as well as Dr. Wynn and the others, are left. Michael steps into the darkness of the hallway and vanishes.

-Cut to a random hallway. Stepping through it is Keith, a Druid member. Cut to another random hallway. Stepping through it is Anthony, another Druid member. Cut to a random rotunda. A Druid member, Gretchen, steps out of the shorter hallway and looks around the five regular hallways to choose from next. She picks a hallway and begins stepping towards it.

-Cut to a random hallway. Now walking and saving their breath are Danny and Jeremy. Cut to another random hallway. Stepping through it is Kara. Cut to two random hallways. Stepping through each of them are Druid members. One is Eugene and the other is Patricia. They both reach the end of their hallways and find themselves stepping into the same rotunda. And they sigh of relief.

-Cut to another random hallway. Stepping through it and leading Stephen are Druid members Samantha and Bruce. Cut to another random hallway. Stepping through it is Tommy. Cut to a random rotunda. Wynn steps out of one of the regular hallways. He looks around at the five other hallways, then begins stepping over to another regular one.

-Cut to a random hallway. As Druid members, Samantha and Bruce, step past two architectural posts and continue leading Stephen, the understated “Hellraiser” theme begins toning. They reach the end of the hallway and step into the next rotunda. At the same time, Michael steps out of the nearest hallway. With both hands, he steps right over to them and slams them against the wall (Thud! Thud!). Just as the understated “Hellraiser” theme is finished toning down, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme quickly takes over.

Samantha: “Argh!”

Bruce: “Argh!”

-With each of his hands on their throats, he begins strangling them (Clench! Clench! Crinch! Crinch!).

Samantha: “Argh! Argh!”

Bruce: “Argh! ARGH!”

-As Michael continues strangling them (Clench! Clench! Crinch! Crinch!), Stephen tenses up and begins stepping back.

Samantha: “ARGH! Argh!”

Bruce: “Argh! ARGH!”

-As Stephen continues stepping away, Michael turns his Halloween-masked head over to him. With his hands still on Samantha’s and Bruce’s throats (Clench! Clench! Crinch! Crinch!), he stares him down and tilts his head to the side.

Samantha: “Argh! ARGH!”

Bruce: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael continues staring down Stephen down. Stephen continues stepping back and tenses up big time. He then turns around and begins running off into the nearest hallway.

Stephen Lloyd: “Aaaaahhhh!”

-Michael watches as Stephen disappears down the hallway. He then turns his attention back to Samantha and Bruce, and continues strangling every last ounce of life from them (Clench! Clench! Crinch! Crinch!).

Samantha: “Argh! Argh!...”

Bruce: “ARGH! Argh!...”

-Cut to a random hallway. As a Druid member, Gretchen, steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda coming up, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme stops cold. She reaches the end of the hallway and steps into the rotunda. She looks around four other hallways, then over to the shorter hallway. And suddenly, before she can make a choice, the rotunda completely turns to darkness. If the labyrinth weren’t dark enough before, she now cannot see a thing.

-Gretchen looks around the darkness. As she does, the dreary undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme begin playing. She continues looking around the darkness. And suddenly, she sees three figures. One is the Female Cenobite, the other is the Chatterer Cenobite, and the last one is the Butterball Cenobite. As the Female Cenobite steps forward, she is slicing two hooks with curved blades against each other (Shing! Shing! Shing!…).

-The darkness lightens up and Gretchen can see them stepping out of three of the regular hallways. As the three Cenobites reach the ends of their hallways, she steps back. She steps back toward the shorter hallway. She steps back into it and turns around. And before she can get away, Pinhead appears within the darkness of the hallway.

Pinhead: “We have such sites to show you.”

-Gretchen tenses up and steps back. She steps back, turns around, and finds herself again facing the three other Cenobites. She has nowhere to go. As the Female Cenobite steps out into the rotunda, she continues slicing the two hooks against each other (…Shing! Shing! Shing!...). As the Chatterer Cenobite steps out into the rotunda, his teeth chatter. And as the Butterball Cenobite steps out into the rotunda, he licks his lips at the thought of her suffering.

-Gretchen tenses up.

Gretchen: “Oh, God…”

Pinhead: “This is not a place of God…”

-The three other Cenobite step out into the middle of the rotunda and stop in their tracks. As they do, the dark “Hellraiser” theme tones down. Pinhead turns to each of them. He then turns to the Female Cenobite and speaks up.

Pinhead: “Ladies first.”

-The Female Cenobite, eager to go first, stops slicing her hooks against each other (…Shing! Shing! Sha-shing!). She then turns to Gretchen. She looks on at her and begins stepping forward. She steps toward Gretchen. Gretchen looks around helplessly in the darkness. She has nowhere to go and no way of escaping. Her fate is sealed. The Female Cenobite steps up to Gretchen and stops. Gretchen, getting a closer look of the Cenobite, is repulsed by her open slit throat.

Female Cenobite: “It isn’t pretty to look at, is it?”

-Without a second thought, the Female Cenobite swings her right hand forward (Swish!) and stabs one of the hooks into Gretchen’s chest (Shing! Splatter!).

Gretchen: “Argh!”

-With her left hand, she swings the other hook forward (Swish!) and slices it across Gretchen’s chest (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Gretchen: “ARGH!”

-With both hooks, the Female Cenobite continues to stab and slice away at Gretchen (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!).

Gretchen: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-As the Female Cenobite continues to stab and slice away at Gretchen (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!), the Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatter away.

Gretchen: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-As the Female Cenobite continues to stab and slice away at Gretchen (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!), the Butterball Cenobite licks his lips.

Gretchen: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-As the Female Cenobite continues to stab and slice away at Gretchen (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!), Pinhead rejoices in her suffering.

Gretchen: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

Pinhead: “Ah, the suffering. The sweet suffering…”

-The Female Cenobite finishes Gretchen off (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!,) and Gretchen finally loses it.

Gretchen: “Argh! ARGH! Argh!...Argh…”

-Gretchen’s body lifelessly falls to the ground (Thud!) and the Female Cenobite prevails. She has done her bidding. Pinhead and the other two Cenobites step over and look down at Gretchen’s slain body.

Pinhead: “If I did not know better, it appears that you have been inspired by Thorn. That was above your usually high standards. And it was nothing short of marvelous.”

Female Cenobite: “Yes, I have been inspired. But only to get the point across that we don’t need Thorn.”

Pinhead: “We will see. Until then, there is more blood and suffering to be had. Our work is not done yet.”

-The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth anxiously chatter away. He could not be more ready to take his turn and do his bidding.

-Cut to a random hallway. Stephen runs past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. As he does, he stops and braces himself. Stephen begins walking forward, one step at a time. Stephen makes his way toward the rotunda and tenses up. He finds himself reaching the end of the hallway and tenses up big time.

-Within three feet of the rotunda, Stephen stops in his tracks. He looks into the rotunda. From where he’s standing, he doesn’t see Michael or anybody. He then braces himself and begins stepping forward. He steps up to the end of the hallway. And he steps within the rotunda. And as soon as he does, he finds himself meeting up with Danny and Jeremy from a nearby hallway. Danny sighs of relief.

Danny Strode: “Stephen! Are you okay?”

-Stephen looks on aimlessly, not knowing what to tell him. At such a young age, the violence he has witnessed is upsetting to his eyes.

Danny Strode: “Where are they?”

-Stephen continues looking on aimlessly.

Danny Strode: “It’s okay. What matters is that you got away. We have to find Tommy and my mom. We have to get out of here.”

Jeremy Walker: “Get out of here? Why?”

Danny Strode: “Because we don’t belong here. We’re in Hell.”

Jeremy Walker: “I don’t care what this place is. I like being here.”

Danny Strode: “Why?”

Jeremy Walker: “Because my mind is free.”

Danny Strode: “It can be free outside of Hell, too. You can get help.”

Jeremy Walker: “I don’t want any more help. I’d rather stay here.”

Danny Strode: “You can’t be serious. Remember what I told you if you saw all of Hell? You’ll get bored of it.”

Jeremy Walker: “I don’t care. I’d rather explore Hell alone than follow you anymore.”

-Jeremy begins stepping back from Danny and Stephen.

Danny Strode: “Jeremy, you can’t leave us. We need you, and we need the box.”

Jeremy Walker: “The box is mine, and you can’t tell me what to do with it.”

-Jeremy turns around and starts walking away into the nearest hallway.

Danny Strode: “Jeremy, come back!”

-Jeremy stops and turns back to Danny.

Jeremy Walker: “No, you stay back. If you don’t, I’ll solve the puzzle again and close the doorway to Hell. Is that what you want?”

-Danny looks on and sighs. There’s nothing he can do to get through to Jeremy.

Jeremy Walker: “Exactly. Now, stay away from me.”

-Jeremy turns around and continues making his way down the hallway. Danny turns to Stephen and begins leading him into another hallway.

Danny Strode: “Come on…”

-Cut to a random hallway. A Druid member, Anthony, steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda coming up. He reaches the end of the hallway and steps into the rotunda. He looks around the four other hallways, then over to the shorter hallway. And suddenly, before he can make a choice, the rotunda completely turns to darkness. He looks around the darkness and cannot see a thing.

-As Anthony continues looking around the darkness, the dreary of undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme begin playing. He continues looking around the darkness. And suddenly, he sees three figures. Within three of the regular hallways, he sees the Female Cenobite, Chatterer Cenobite and Butterball Cenobite stepping forward. Anthony begins stepping back. He steps back toward the shorter hallway and Pinhead appears within it.

Pinhead: “Where do you think you’re going? Once you’ve had the privilege of seeing Hell with your own eyes, there is no going back…”

-Anthony turns around. Upon seeing Pinhead, he tenses up.

Pinhead: “…You, my friend, have purchased a one-way ticket and you are here to stay.”

-Anthony steps away from Pinhead and turns around. He again finds himself facing the three other Cenobites and tenses up big time. He then turns back to Pinhead and shrugs.

Anthony: “Dr. Wynn accepted responsibility for opening the box! He accepted the responsibility for all our actions! All I did was follow him.”

Pinhead: “Indeed, you did. Your heart believed in him, and your heart followed him into Hell. And now, your heart belongs to us.”

-The three other Cenobite step out into the middle of the rotunda and stop in their tracks. As they do, the dark “Hellraiser” theme tones down. Pinhead turns to the Chatterer Cenobite and the Butterball Cenobite. The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth anxiously chatter away. Pinhead, however, turns his attention the Butterball Cenobite instead.

Pinhead: “Your turn. I expect to see much inspiration in your performance. Don’t just make him suffer for Leviathan, make him suffer for Thorn.”

-The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth stop chattering, and the Female Cenobite stops slicing the hooks in her hands (…Shing! Shing! Sha-shing!). The Butterball Cenobite looks on at Pinhead, then over to Anthony. Anthony tenses up. The Butterball Cenobite then takes off his dark glasses and begins stepping forward. As he does, Anthony looks around helplessly in the darkness. He has nowhere to go and no way of escaping. His fate is sealed.

-The Butterball Cenobite steps up to Anthony. Hanging from his leather suit are his own set of hooks with curved blades. He reaches for two of them (Shing! Shing!) and stops in front of Anthony. Anthony, getting a closer look of the hideous looking Cenobite, can see his beady eyes and he tenses up big time. The Butterball Cenobite looks on at Anthony for a moment. And then, he swings his right hand forward (Swish!) and slices one of the hooks across Anthony’s chest (Shing! Splatter!).

Anthony: “Argh!”

-With his left hand, he swings the other hook forward (Swish!) and dices it across Anthony’s chest (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Anthony: “ARGH!”

-With both hooks, the Butterball Cenobite continues to slice and dice away at Anthony (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!).

Anthony: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-As the Butterball Cenobite continues to slice and dice away at Anthony (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!), the Female Cenobite rejoices in his suffering.

Anthony: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

Female Cenobite: “Ah, this suffering…”

-As the Butterball Cenobite continues to slice and dice away at Anthony (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!), the Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatter away.

Anthony: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-As the Butterball Cenobite continues to slice and dice away at Anthony (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!), Pinhead rejoices in his suffering.

Anthony: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

Pinhead: “Ah, the suffering. The sweet suffering…”

-The Butterball Cenobite continues to slice and dice away at Anthony with no end (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!). The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth continue chattering away, while the Female Cenobite rolls her eyes. Is the Butterball Cenobite trying to outdo her?

Anthony: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-With his left hand, the Butterball Cenobite slices one of the hooks across Anthony’s chest one last time (Shing! Splatter!).

Anthony: “Argh!”

-And with his right hand, the Butterball Cenobite slices the other hook across Anthony’s throat (Sha-a-ashi-i-ing! Spla-a-atter!).

Anthony: “A-a-a-argh!...”

-Anthony loses it and his body lifelessly falls to the ground (Thud!). The Butterball Cenobite puts his dark glasses back on, while Pinhead and the other two Cenobites step over and look down at Anthony’s slain body.

Pinhead: “You have not disappointed. Not in the least. Well done…”

-Pinhead turns to the Chatterer Cenobite.

Pinhead: “…You are up next. I expect you to follow their examples.”

-The Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatter away at the thought of finally taking his turn and doing his bidding.

-Cut to a random hallway. Kara steps past architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. She reaches the end of the hallway and steps into the rotunda. She looks over to the four other hallways to choose from. She then looks over to the shorter hallway. She looks back over to the four other hallways, then back over to shorter hallway again. And this time, she decides to pick the shorter one again. She slowly steps into the shorter hallway and disappears within its darkness.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #21  
Old 06-30-2012, 05:59 PM
Helloween - Part 18

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Moments later, Kara steps out of the other end of the shorter hallway. And instead of another rotunda, she finds herself in another hallway. This is one is wider and, just like the longer hallways with the architectural posts, appears to go on forever. Along each wall are entrances into cells, and heard from each of them are the wailings of tortured souls. Some of them are clearly not enjoying it, while others are. She can hear much, much wailing coming from all the way down the hallway.

Kara Strode: “Oh, God…”

-Kara reluctantly steps over to the nearest cell. Cut to her point of view as she steps over to its entrance and peeks in. What she sees is a figure with no skin sitting in a contraption with - Sca-reeeech! The camera immediately pulls away as Kara steps away from the cell in disgust. She can’t bear to look inside it any longer.

Kara Strode: “Oh, God! Oh, God!...”

Frank Cotton: “God has nothing to do with this…”

-Kara turns around and sees a young man standing by the entrance of the opposite cell. Unlike the other tortured soul, he has not been stripped of his flesh. Wearing jeans and a tanktop, he looks on at her with interest.

Frank Cotton: “I’m forbidden from walking out of my cell, but you are welcome to come in anytime.”

Kara Strode: “No thank you.”

Frank Cotton: “You sure? You must be here for a reason. If you were that repulsed by what saw in there, you clearly have not been put through initiation yet. Listen, before they do put you through initiation and open you to a dark world of pain and pleasure, consider something. How long has it been since you were intimate with a man? When was the last time you’ve felt physical contact and almost couldn’t bear how powerful it felt? Well, imagine being deprived of all that. I have. Who knows, you might also be deprived of it in your own personal Hell. So, before they find you down here, consider paying me a visit. I promise I’ll be gentle.”

-At first, Kara turns away from Frank in utter disgust. She then turns back to him and half-heartedly speaks up.

Kara Strode: “Again…no thank you.”

-Kara begins walking back over to the shorter hallway. As she does, the figure from the first cell suddenly steps up to the entrance and completely startles her.

Figure: “BOOOOO!”

Kara Strode: “Gaaaaahhhh!”

-Kara steps back over to the opposite cell. She stumbles into its entrance and into Frank’s arms. Frank takes hold of her and pulls out a switchblade (Shing!)

Kara Strode: “No! Nooo! Let me go! Let me go!”

Frank Cotton: “Sorry, babe. Nothing personal. If you were deprived of pleasure as long as I have been, you would be doing the same thing.”

Kara Strode: “No! Nooo! No!”

-Frank looks down at Kara and licks his lips. He then turns to the figure in the opposite cell.

Frank Cotton: “Thanks, Ted.”

-Ted, with all his all flesh removed and his muscles and ribs showing, speaks up.

Ted: “No problem. I just hope this will stop your crying. It gets really distracting.”

Frank Cotton: “Yeah, and you guys and all your wailing. It kills me. Well, from now on, I don’t think you’ll be hearing anymore crying from me…”

-Frank turns his attention back to Kara.

Frank Cotton: “…Come here. Come to Daddy.”

Kara Strode: “No! No!”

-Frank pulls Kara away from the entrance and into his cell.

Kara Strode: “Nooo!”

-Cut to a random hallway. Two Druid members, Patricia and Eugene, step past two architectural posts and begin making out the rotunda coming up. They reach the end of the hallway and step into the rotunda. They look around the four other hallways, then over to the shorter hallway. And suddenly, before they can make a choice, the rotunda completely turns to darkness. They look around the darkness and cannot see a thing.

-As Patricia and Eugene continue looking around the darkness, the dreary undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme begin playing. They continue looking around the darkness. And suddenly, they see three figures. Within three of the regular hallways, they see the Female Cenobite, Chatterer Cenobite and the Butterball Cenobite stepping forward. They begin stepping back.

Patricia: “Oh my God…”

Eugene: “This cannot be happening…”

-They step back towards the shorter hallway and Pinhead appears within it.

Pinhead: “It is, indeed, happening. You are not imagining things…”

-Patricia and Eugene turn around. Upon seeing Pinhead, they tense up.

Pinhead: “...And please, feel free to utter God’s name in vain all you wish. Because down here, God does not exist. Down here, God will not punish you for your sins. Instead, we will punish you for your actions. We will insure that you suffer for your every action against man. And who knows…you may even enjoy it.”

-Patricia and Eugene turn to each other in disbelief, then step back. They turn and see the three other Cenobites stepping into the middle of the rotunda, and the dark “Hellraiser” theme tones down. The Cenobites stop in their tracks and face the two Druid members. The Female Cenobite is slicing two hooks with curved blades against each other (Shing! Shing! Shing!...), the Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth are anxiously chattering away, and the Butterball Cenobite is licking his lips at the thought of their suffering. Pinhead turns to the Chatterer Cenobite.

Pinhead: “Your patience has rewarded you. You have not one, but two souls to make examples out of. Make it good. Do it for Leviathan. And do it for Thorn.”

-The Female Cenobite stops slicing her hooks (…Shing! Shing! Sha-shing!), while the Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth anxiously chatter away. The female Cenobite rolls her eyes and turns to Pinhead.

Female Cenobite: “Surely, you can give me one of them. How is he going to make examples out of two souls at once?”

Pinhead: “Nonsense. He has earned this. He can make both of them suffer at once, or make each of them suffer one at a time. However he chooses…”

-Pinhead turns to the Chatterer Cenobite.

Pinhead: “…Well?”

-The Chatterer Cenobite turns to Pinhead and stops chattering his teeth. He then turns to the two Druid members and reaches for two of the hooks with curved blades hanging from his leather suit (Shing! Shing!). He begins stepping toward them, and they tense up big time. He steps up to the two Druid members and stands his ground.

-The Chatterer Cenobite faces the two Druid members, then turns to Pinhead. Pinhead looks on. He then turns his attention to both Patricia and Eugene. His teeth begin chattering again and he swings both hooks forward (Swish! Swish!). He swings the hooks into their chests and into their hearts (Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter! Splatter!).

Patricia: “Argh! ARGH!”

Eugene: “Argh! Argh!”

-He keeps the hooks in place and his teeth chatter away.

Patricia: “Argh! Argh!

Eugene: “ARGH! Argh!”

-He keeps the hooks in the place for an unbearable moment.

Patricia: “Argh! ARGH!”

Eugene: “Argh! ARGH!”

-He keeps the hooks in place and blood begins oozing from each of their wounds.

Patricia: “ARGH! Argh!”

Eugene: “Argh! Argh!”

-The Female Cenobite surprisingly finds herself enjoying the Chatterer Cenobite’s handiwork.

Female Cemale: “Ah, this suffering…”

-The Butterball Cenobite licks his lips at the thought of how excruciating their suffering must be, while Pinhead also rejoices in their suffering.

Pinhead: “Ah, the suffering. The sweet suffering…”

-As the Chatterer Cenobite keeps the hooks in place for a long unbearable moment, the Druid members start losing it.

Patricia: “Argh! ARGH!...Argh…”

Eugene: “ARGH! Argh!...Argh…”

-As both of their arms and legs begin going limp, the Chatterer Cenobite pulls out both hooks (Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter! Splatter!). Their bodies lifelessly fall to the ground (Thud! Thud!) and the Chatterer Cenobite prevails. Pinhead and the other two Cenobites step over and look down at their slain bodies.
Pinhead: “Well done. It was so simple. Yet, it was also brutal, as well as excruciating and interminable. You have served Leviathan, and also Thorn, well…”

-Pinhead turns to all three Cenobites.

Pinhead: “…There is now one remaining soul left. I would prefer Thorn finish what it started. However, If Thorn is unable to catch up with the last foolish mind in an acceptable amount of time, we might have to finish the hunt for it. And after that, it will be time to prepare for the final ceremony.”

-Cut to the Frank’s cell. Surprisingly placed inside it is a comfortable, queen-sized bed meant for two people. In the corner is a desk and mirror with Frank’s photo, as well as make-up available for any woman who stops by. To Frank, this is supposed to his own personal Hell. By being teased of what he can’t have. For a long time, he truly has been deprived of pleasure…until now.

-As the scene reveals, Frank is tying Kara to the bed. With the use of torn up bed sheets, he has tied her wrists to the bed posts, and is now tying her ankles to the other bed posts. He also stuffed a piece of bed sheet in her mouth and tied it around the back of her head.

Kara Strode: “A-hhhh! A-hhhh! A-hhhhhhh!”

-Frank finishes tying her to the bed. He then stands back up and looks down at her.

Frank Cotton: “Do you how long it’s been since I’ve been with a woman? So long, I’ve lost track of time. Down here, there is no sense of time. Hell lasts for eternity. I would love to find out what year it’s supposed to be right now, but you’re not in the position to tell me, are you?”

-Kara, unable to say a single thing, glares up at him.

Frank Cotton: “No matter…”

-Frank begins stepping away from the bed post.

Frank Cotton: “…I’d rather not know. Once one adapts to the misery of…all this…trust me, you would rather remain lost in time…”

-As Frank steps around to the side of the bed, he points out his cell.

Frank Cotton: “…All this…this is what they consider my way of suffering. By placing me near all these chronic masturbators lucky enough to receive in pleasure, pain, or both. They’re lucky bastards. While they are free to rejoice in their lust for blood, I am offered a few meaningless luxuries ordinary men would die for. I’m forced to sit tight and listen to all of the rest of them have their ways…”

-Frank sits down on the bed and leans close in on Kara. Kara tenses up.

Kara Strode: “A-hhh…”

Frank Cotton: “…How did you end up here anyway? You can either die or open the puzzle box. You might know what I’m talking about or you might not. If you died, I can only hope you went out in a bang. If not, I can’t imagine dying in a simple, boring manner. What is the point?...”

-Frank turns away from Kara and gets off the bed.

Frank Cotton: “…When I opened the box, I was only offered a taste of pain and pleasure. After that, nothing. They let me rot in one place for a while, and then brought back here. There’s some more bullshit along the way, but there’s no reason to elaborate on it. That’s my story, what’s yours?”

-Kara glares up at him.

Frank Cotton: “You don’t have one? You would rather listen to me pour what’s left of my heart out? Fine by me. It’s your choice…”

-Frank sits down on the bed again.

Frank Cotton: “…Now that you’re here, we have plenty of time to learn about each other…”

-Frank looks down at Kara in a suggestive manner. He then reaches for her shirt. He takes hold of it and begins pulling it back. As he begins exposing her bare chest, Kara tenses up.

Kara Strode: “A-hhh…A-hhh…”

-Frank continues pulling her shirt back, exposing more of her bare chest. Kara tenses up big time and her eyes water up.

Kara Strode: “A-hhh…A-hhh…A-hhhhhhh…”

-Frank is almost done exposing Kara’s bare chest. He continues pulling the shirt back and exposes the bra covering up her breasts.

Kara Strode: “A-hhh…A-hhhhhhh…”

-Just as Frank takes hold of the bra and is about expose Kara’s breasts, he takes notice of the tears rolling down her cheeks. He stops what he’s doing and shrugs.

Frank Cotton: “Look at that. We have participated in only little bit of foreplay, and it is already reducing you to tears. Are they tears of joy?”

-Kara could not me more frightened. She has seen the demons who watch over Hell, yet it is the soul of a disturbed man scaring her the most.

Kara Strode: “A-hhhh…A-hhhh…A-hhhhhhh…”

Frank Cotton: “Don’t worry. The pleasure is only beginning. However…who knows when they’ll find you here? What if they take you away? While I would like to know you better, we might not have enough time for foreplay. We might be better off just cutting straight to the point.”

-Frank climbs onto the bed and kneels over Kara. As he begins unbuckling the belt around his jeans, he speaks up.

Frank Cotton: “I hope you’re not too uncomfortable…Actually, I hope you are. Because trust me, it’s more fun this way.”

Kara Strode: “A-hhh…”

-Frank finishes unbuckling his belt. He is about to unzip his pants, then stops. He instead turns his attention to Kara’s pants. He takes hold of them and start pulling them down.

Kara Strode: “A-hhh…A-hhhhh…”

Tommy Doyle: “Get away from her!”

-Frank stops what he’s doing and looks back. Standing in the entrance of his cell is Tommy. By focusing on the shorter hallways, Tommy has found his way here. And just in time. Frank looks on at Tommy, then turns back to Kara.

Frank Cotton: “So, I have to fight for your pleasure, huh?”

Kara Strode: “A-hhh! A-hhhhh!”

Tommy Doyle: “Kara! I said, get away from her!”

-Frank gets off the bed and faces Tommy. He then pulls out his switchblade. He pulls open the blade (Shing!) and shrugs.

Frank Cotton: “So, I take it you’ve already done her?...”

-Frank begins stepping forward. Tommy stands his ground.

Frank Cotton: “…Once I’m done ripping your bloody heart out, what should I expect from her? Is she good? Is she great? Or, is she like fucking a dried-out piece of wood? She’s young, so I imagine she must offer something appetizing…”

-Frank steps within a few feet of Tommy and stops.

Frank Cotton: “…Tell me, once I’m done with you, am I going to look forward to fucking her inside and out?”

Tommy Doyle: “Stop talking about her that way.”

Frank Cotton: “Struck a nerve, huh? I know what must be going on in your head. You can see her right now. Tied to the bed. Admit it, you like her that way.”

Tommy Doyle: “No, I don’t. And I already told you once. Stop talking about her that way.”

-Frank looks on at Tommy. Tommy bravely faces Frank. Frank continues looking on, and then suddenly swings the switchblade forward with his right hand (Swish!). Tommy quickly ducks away. With his left hand, Frank then punches Tommy in the gut (Pow!). Tommy bends forward in agony.

Tommy Doyle: “Uwww!”

-Frank takes hold of Tommy and throws him inside the cell. Tommy is struck against a wall (Thud!).

Tommy Doyle: “Ooof!”

-Frank walks over to Tommy. He picks him up and then swings the switchblade back (Swish!). Tommy shrugs and punches Frank in the chest.

Frank Cotton: “Uww!”

-Tommy continues punching Frank in the chest (Pow! Pow! Pow!), and Frank starts stumbling back.

Frank Cotton: “Uww! Uww! Uww!”

-Tommy then punches him in the face (Pow!).

Frank Cotton: “Uww!”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #22  
Old 06-30-2012, 06:06 PM
Helloween - Part 19

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Frank loses his footing, turns around and falls forward onto the bed (Thwump!). In the process, his right hand slashes the switchblade into the bed (Shing!) – only a few inches away from Kara.

Kara Strode: “A-hhh!”

-Tommy steps right up Frank. Kara watches as Frank lays forward on the bed. At first, she sees no sign of a response from him. And then, he suddenly opens his eyes. Just as Tommy gets down to pick Frank up, Frank turns to Kara in a wicked manner, and then elbows Tommy in the chest (Thwonk!).

Tommy Doyle: “Ooof!”

-Tommy stumbles back. As Frank gets up from the bed, he turns back to Kara in a sinister manner.

Frank Cotton: “I’ll be with you in a moment, dear…”

Kara Strode: “A-hhhhh!”

-Leaving the blade in the bed, Frank stands back up and walks over to Tommy. Proving to be tougher of the two men, Frank takes hold of Tommy and slams him into the wall (Thud!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uwww!”

-He pulls Tommy back and slams into the wall again (Thud!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uwww!”

-Kara watches as her man is assaulted by Frank.

Kara Strode: “A-hhhh!”

-She then takes notice of the switchblade sticking into the bed. With her left hand, she is just able to reach it and pull it out of the bed (Shing!). She takes hold of it and tries to swing it around to cut the bed sheet wrapped around the bed post and her left wrist.

-Back over by the wall, Frank is punching Tommy in the chest (Pow! Pow! Pow!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uww! Uww! Uww!”

-He then punches Tommy in the face (Pow!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uww!”

Frank Cotton: “I just thought I’d return the favor!”

-Back over by the bed, Kara cuts away at the bed sheet. She manages to cut through it and free her left arm. She then reaches over and pulls the cleave gag out of her mouth.

Kara Strode: “A-hhh! Aaah! Tommy!”

-Upon seeing Tommy still being assaulted, she shrugs and quickly starts cutting the bed sheet around her other wrist.

-Back over by the wall, Frank punches away at Tommy (Pow! Pow! Pow!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uww! Uww! Uww!”

-He then kicks his right leg back and knees him in the chest (Thwonk!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uww!”

-Tommy bends over in agony and Frank takes the opportunity to kick him in the chest (Kick!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uww! Ooof!”

-Tommy falls over to his side (Thud!) and Frank prevails.

Frank Cotton: “You know, I just realized something. Pleasure is not the only thing I’m been missing in my afterlife. I also miss beating the crap out of pussies like you!”

-Just as Tommy gets to his knees, Frank kicks him in the chest again (Kick!).

Tommy Doyle: “Uww!”

-Tommy struggles to get to his knees again. Frank first waits for Tommy to fully get to his knees and look up at him. As soon as Tommy does look up at Frank, Frank punches him in the face (Pow!) and kicks him in the chest (Kick!). Tommy falls back down again.

Tommy Doyle: “Uww! Uww! Ooof!”

Frank Cotton: “Just like an old dog. You’ll never learn.”

-As he sees Tommy struggling to get up again, he mutters to himself.
Frank Cotton: “I’ve had enough fun and games. This is getting old. It’s about time I finished him off. Now, where did I leave the switchblade? Oh, right…”

-Frank turns around to retrieve the switchblade from the bed. Instead, the next thing he sees is Kara walking right up to him and stabbing the switchblade into his chest (Shing! Splatter!).

Frank Cotton: “Argh! ARGH!”

Kara Strode: “How do you like that? Huh? Weren’t you just talking about how you missed experiencing pain and pleasure? Or, was it the pleasure of experiencing pain? Either way, I answered your wish. I hope it’s fucking worth it.”

-Down on the ground, Tommy sees blood dripping. He looks up to see the blood coming from Frank, and Kara confronting him.

Tommy Doyle: “Uhh…Kara?...”

-With the switchblade still in Frank’s chest, Kara watches as he struggles with the continuing agony of her attack.

Frank Cotton: “Argh! Argh! ARGH!”

-As he coughs up blood (Spew!), he faces Kara and struggles to speak up.

Frank Cotton: “Argh! Bleah!...Argh...You know what…Argh…I actually did enjoy it a little…Argh…thanks for the favor…Argh…bitch…”

-Frank loses it, and his arms and legs go limp. Kara steps out of the way and his lifeless body falls forward. As Frank’s lifeless body falls to the ground (Thud!), the switchblade is forced through the rest of his body (Sha-shing!). Tommy picks himself back up and steps over to Kara. Both of them look down at the fresh wound in Frank’s back. The whiteness of his tanktop is quickly turning red as much blood is gushing from the wound.

Kara Strode: “Uhhh…”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m no doctor, but I think you got him in the heart…”

Kara Strode: “Good…”

-Kara then shrugs and turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “…Tommy! Oh, Tommy! Are you all right?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’ll live. I’ll be okay.”

-Kara checks the bruises on his face.

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh! I can’t believe he did this to you!”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s okay. Really. I’ll be fine.”

-Kara continues checking his bruises, then turns her attention back to him.

Kara Strode: “You saved me. You saved my life again. This time from a complete sicko. You saved me from, oh, God-doesn’t-even-know-what…”

Tommy Doyle: “Not really. I tried to save you, but he was tougher than I was. You actually saved me.”

Kara Strode: “No. We saved each other.”

-Kara turns to Tommy for a moment, then hugs him. Tommy hugs her back, then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Come on, we have to get out of here. We have to get out of this hallway and get back where we came from.”

Kara Strode: “You’re right about that. Let’s go.”

-Kara and Tommy step out of the cell and over to the shorter hallway.

-Cut to two random hallways. In one of them is Wynn and in the other one is Jeremy. As Jeremy steps past two architectural posts, his focus is on the darkness ahead of him and also the upcoming rotunda that will point him into five other directions to explore. In the back of his mind, he can’t picture himself ever getting bored of this labyrinth.

-As Wynn steps past two architectural posts, he can’t help but glance at them and admire their craftsmanship. And as repulsed as he is by the unnatural violence he’s witnessed, a part of him admires the mystery surrounding Hell. Wynn and Jeremy reach the ends of their hallways and find themselves stepping into the same rotunda.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy. I have finally found you. I hope you haven’t found your visit here too disturbing.”

-At first, Jeremy finds his focus more interested in the darkness of the five other hallways to choose from. But, with his mind much clearer now than it ever was in the real world, he forces himself to turn his attention to Wynn and speak up.

Jeremy Walker: “Not at all. I like it here.”

Dr. Wynn: “Really? I am happy to hear that.”

-Jeremy focuses his attention Wynn for a moment. For the first time, his mind is allowing him to think for himself and wonder what Wynn had in mind for him all along.

Jeremy Walker: “The box is mine. You can’t take it from me.”

Dr. Wynn: “I never said it wasn’t. I wouldn’t dream of taking it away from you.”

Jeremy Walker: “If I find Leviathan again, I’m going to open the box again and solve the puzzle.”

Dr. Wynn: “What is Leviathan?”

Jeremy Walker: “It’s the source of power that controls everything here. I saw it and it told me what it was. It told me to open the box again and close the doorway. It’s also making my mind clear.”

Dr. Wynn: “So, Leviathan is this source of power here…my word. Again, I am happy to learn that this place is benefitting in your health. That is one of the reasons I intended to bring you here.”

Jeremy Walker: “No, it isn’t. You didn’t know this place could help me.”

-As it appears, Jeremy’s mind is clear enough for him to see through Wynn’s lies. Wynn, surprised to see Jeremy acting on sharper instincts, shrugs.

Dr. Wynn: “You’re right. That was a lie. I honestly didn’t know what else to tell you a moment ago. I apologize for patronizing you.”

Jeremy Walker: “Why did you make me open the doorway to this place?”

Dr. Wynn: “I intended to come here on my own personal gain, so that I could help Thorn.”

Jeremy Walker: “I believe you. Why did you want to help me?”

-Wynn turns to Jeremy for a moment. Jeremy looks on at Wynn with no problem keeping his full attention focused on him for extended period of time. He isn’t even blinking. Wynn looks on at Jeremy, then begins stepping forward. He steps up to Jeremy and kneels down. He gets down to Jeremy’s level and begins speaking up.

Dr. Wynn: “I will tell you why I wanted to help you. One year ago, you were brought into my institution. I was told that you suffered from disturbing tendencies that prevented you from speaking to other people, as well focusing your attention on anything else. When I began looking over you, I knew right away that they were wrong. You have a beautiful mind. The problem is that you have no control over it. It wasn’t your lack of control that told you to murder that man. It was the lack of seriousness in the environment you lived in. Your mother loved you and was apparently the only person who could reach out to you. And from what I’m told, your father didn’t put any effort into getting to know you as his son. That is only the beginning of the problems you had to face for so long. And considering your young age, you were very fortunate to receive my help. If you had acted on your darkest impulse later on in your adult life, it might have been too late for me or anyone to help you. Before I brought you here…”

Jeremy Walker: “You’re not answering my question. Why did you want to help me? Did you know about this place before I was put in your care?”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes, I did. As long as I have served under Thorn, I have always been aware of Pandora’s Box and other supernatural beliefs. It is a requirement on our part to have an understanding of all sanctuaries of the supernatural similar and dissimilar to our Celtic beliefs. However, it was two months ago when I decided to turn to Pandora’s Box in order to help Thorn. By then, my daughter and I had already succeeded in getting you to open your mind to the outside world again. And it was one month ago when I discovered that you had the ability to open the doorway to this world. I came to this discovery after extensive research on Pandora’s Box. I did more research than required in my original studies and discovered that a brilliant mind like yours was capable of correctly opening the doorway. I came to this discovery after my daughter and I had already brought much more of your focus back to the outside world. If you wish, I can elaborate on the time we spent reaching out to you. Would you like to hear about it?”

Jeremy Walker: “Yes.”

Dr. Wynn: “Every moment I spent with you was special. You see, I serve two positions. I serve to guide Thorn and I also serve to help people with troubled minds. I have always taken both positions very seriously. As matter of fact…”

-Wynn sighs.

Dr. Wynn: “…This passion has cost me my family. My wife died of cancer several years ago. It’s possible that more time spent with her might have not have led to such ugly circumstances. I also wasn’t there for my daughter. I neglected her and she lacked the father figure she needed…much like how your father neglected you because of your disability. Well, I knew you were special the moment I met you. I knew you were hiding a talent that could help make the world a more unique place. I don’t know if you’re aware, but it was my daughter who first got you to focus your mind again. After that, both of us continued reaching out to you and got you to focus more and more on the outside world. I will fully admit. I failed to guide Thorn. After all, it has led to opening the doorway to this place…”

Jeremy Walker: “The doorway to Hell.”

Dr. Wynn: “Um, indeed, yes. And on the other hand, I believe I have proven to be more successful at helping troubled minds like yours. While my daughter was the one to first successfully reach out to you, I have successfully reached out to many other people with troubled minds similar to yours. And I cherish every moment I was fortunate to spend helping you.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #23  
Old 06-30-2012, 06:13 PM
Helloween - Part 20

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Jeremy turns to Wynn for a moment, then speaks up.

Jeremy Walker: “I believe you.”

Dr. Wynn: “I’m glad to hear that.”

Jeremy Walker: “You see yourself less as a person now after failing Thorn and not being there for your family.”

-Wynn, surprised to see Jeremy seeing through him and his death wish, shrugs.

Dr. Wynn: “That is partially true.”

Jeremy Walker: “Don’t act on that impulse. Don’t let Leviathan give your life away, because of your mistakes. There will more people like me in the future. There will always be people with minds that torture them and prevent the outside world from understanding them.”

Dr. Wynn: “I have considered that. In my lifetime, I have been fortunate to help many people like you. From my first year serving at Smith’s Grove to this last year with you. But this is not entirely about giving away my life for my mistakes. It is also about my age. I’m an old man now. I cannot continue helping people forever. That is why I was very fortunate to have a daughter follow in my footsteps. To pick up where I left off. To continue helping troubled minds and guiding Thorn. That is what this is really about.”

Jeremy Walker: “The other Dr. Wynn also helped me and cared about me. But she won’t be able to help anymore people like me.”

Dr. Wynn: “Why is that?”

Jeremy Walker: “Because she now walks with the tortured souls in Hell.”

Dr. Wynn: “What the devil do you mean?”

Jeremy Walker: “Thorn killed her.”

Dr. Wynn: “Why, I refuse to believe this. It simply cannot be true. She was destined to lead Thorn after me. Why would Thorn murder its next leader?”

Jeremy Walker: “Because she didn’t get to lead Thorn. You didn’t let her.”

-Wynn turns to Jeremy very questionably. His mind is quickly becoming sharper and is also becoming aware of subjects he was never told.

Dr. Wynn: “How do you know about this? Who is telling you?”

Jeremy Walker: “Leviathan is telling me. It told me about your beliefs and is helping me understand your pain.”

Dr. Wynn: “I’m willing to believe that your instincts are growing stronger in a heightened environment. However, I refuse believe that something from the beyond is allowing you to see everything around you like a sixth sense. I simply refuse to believe it…”

-Wynn looks around the other hallways to choose from and picks one.

Dr. Wynn: “…Let’s keep moving. We have to find my daughter and the others.”

-Wynn begins leading Jeremy down a regular hallway.

Jeremy Walker: “Most of the others are dead. Your daughter and eleven other Druid members have been murdered. Eight of them by Thorn and four of them by those that serve under Leviathan...”

Dr. Wynn: “It’s nonsense. Simply nonsense…”

-Cut to a random hallway. A Druid member, Keith, steps past two architectural posts and begins making out the rotunda up ahead. He reaches the end of the hallway and steps into the rotunda. He looks around the four other hallways, then over to the shorter hallway. And suddenly, before he can make a choice, the rotunda completely turns to darkness. He looks around the darkness and cannot see a thing.

-As Keith continues looking around the darkness, the dreary undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme being playing. He continues looking around the darkness. And suddenly, he sees three figures. Within three of the regular hallways, he sees the Female Cenobite, Chatterer Cenobite and the Butterball Cenobite stepping forward. Keith begins stepping back. He steps back toward the shorter hallway and Pinhead appears within it.

Pinhead: “You are the last of your own kind. The last of your species…”

-Keith turns around. Upon seeing Pinhead, he tenses up.

Pinhead: “…You and eleven others foolishly believed in Wynn, and this is what it has come to. Your fellow believers have already suffered for their actions and will continue to suffer in their own personal Hells until the end of time. And now, it is your turn to accept the consequences of your own actions.”

-Keith faces Pinhead for a moment in disbelief. Pinhead looks on at him. As he does, the three other Cenobites step into the middle of the rotunda and stop in their tracks. As always, the Female Cenobite is slicing two hooks with curved blades against each other (Shing! Shing! Shing!...). As the dark “Hellraiser” theme tones down, Keith continues facing Pinhead. He then shrugs and bravely speaks up.

Keith: “You’re right. I should suffer the consequences of my actions. I believed in Wynn, and my belief in him led me into Hell. Once in Hell, I began to think twice about what I was doing. But that doesn’t matter, does it? It doesn’t matter when I looked back on my poor judgment and regretted sabotaging Melinda. Wynn wished to accept sole responsibility for the rest of us defying Thorn and willingly entering Hell. And he was foolish to bring up such a notion. Just as he was foolish to sabotage his daughter’s leadership. He is responsible for his own actions, and I am responsible for my own. If it’s possible, I ask for one thing.”

Pinhead: “And what is that?”

Keith: “For you to reconsider my fate. Like you said, my fellow believers have already suffered for their actions. I am the last of them to be sacrificed. And instead of sacrificing me, allow me to return home with the ultimate message. Allow me to reveal to the outside world the consequences of acting against our beliefs. More importantly, allow me to suffer the consequences of my actions under the law of my own beliefs. Under the Celtic beliefs of the Druids. Because one day, people will look back on what happened on this Samhain. And there should be someone who can tell them why it went wrong and what mistakes to never repeat ever again. That someone should be me.”

-Pinhead looks on at Keith for a moment. Keith bravely faces Pinhead. Pinhead then begins speaking up.

Pinhead: “Of the few souls we were fortunate to make examples out of on this event, you have brought the most persuasive argument to the table. Instead of suffering for your actions in Hell, you would rather face the humility brought onto you from others at home. You would rather make an example of yourself and teach a valuable lesson to others. You would rather be spit on by your fellow peers for your mistakes, than hide from them for the rest of eternity here in Hell. So eloquently spoken…and yet, also so meaningless.”

Keith: “What?”

Pinhead: “You wish for redemption. Well, we do not happen to offer redemption. Not here. All we offer is pain and pleasure. Take your pick.”

-Keith looks on disbelief. There really is no getting out of this. Pinhead looks on at the three other Cenobites. He turns to each of them. The Female Cenobite turns to Pinhead and stops slicing her two hooks against each other (…Shing! Shing! Sha-shing!). The Butterball Cenobite takes off his dark glasses and licks his lips at the thought being offered another victim. And the Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth anxiously chatter away.

-Pinhead turns to each of them for a moment. And just as he is about to make a choice, another figure steps out of the darkness. It is Michael. As he steps out of one of the hallways, the eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. He steps out into the rotunda and turns his Halloween-masked head to Keith. Keith tenses up.

-Michael then turns to Pinhead. Pinhead looks on at Michael. Michael then turns to the three other Cenobites. What are they doing here? Are they waiting for him to make Keith suffer for his actions, or were they planning on doing the job for him?

Pinhead: “Michael, your presence could not be more welcome. You have arrived in time to finish off the last of the foolish minds to betray you and your beliefs. By all means, he is all yours.”

-Michael looks on at Pinhead for a moment. He then turns to Keith and begins stepping forward. He steps into the middle of the rotunda and over to Keith. He stops and faces him. As he does, Keith tenses up big time. Michael breathes heavily and stares him down with his dead-like eyes. And then, with his left hand, he reaches over for Keith (Clench!).

-Holding Keith by one of his shoulders, Michael pulls out the kitchen knife with his right hand (Swish!). And as he swings it back (Swish!), the eerie “Halloween” theme plays on. He swings the knife forward and stabs Keith in the chest (Shing! Splatter!).

Keith: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs Keith again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Keith: “ARGH!”

-Michael stabs Keith once more (Shing! Splatter!).

Keith: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs Keith once again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Keith: “ARGH”

-Michael stabs Keith one more time (Shing! Splatter!)

Keith: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs Keith some more (Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Keith: “Argh! ARGH!”

-As Michael continues stabbing Keith (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter), the Female Cenobite rejoices in his suffering.

Keith: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

Female Cenobite: “Ah, this suffering…”

-As Michael continues stabbing Keith (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!), the Butterball Cenobite licks his lips.

Keith: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-As Michael continues stabbing Keith (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!), the Chatterer Cenobite’s teeth chatter away.

Keith: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

-As Michael continues stabbing Keith (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!), Pinhead rejoices in his suffering.

Keith: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH!”

Pinhead: “Ah, the suffering. The sweet suffering…”

-Michael continues stabbing Keith (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!), and Keith starts losing it .

Keith: “Argh! ARGH! Argh!...Argh…”

-Michael stabs Keith in the chest one more time (Shing! Splatter!). He then pulls the knife back (Sha-shing!) and Keith’s body lifelessly falls to the ground (Thud!). As the eerie “Halloween” theme begins toning down, Michael steps back and looks down at Keith’s slain body. And he tilts his head to the side. Pinhead and the other Cenobites look over at Keith’s body from a distance. Pinhead then turns to Michael and speaks up.

Pinhead: “What we just witnessed was a masterpiece. Your performance was so compelling, it was spellbinding. I don’t know how else to describe it, it was simply just beautiful. And that is why I am offering you a role here within Hell. If you were to join us, you really would fit right in.”

-Michael continues looking down at Keith’s body. He then turns to Pinhead in a questionable manner. Keith cannot be the last Druid member to finish off. He knows there are supposed to be four others. What has happened to them?
Pinhead: “After seeing how conflicted you were in our last encounter, I felt compelled to help you on your journey. We have assisted in making examples out of four of the foolish minds to betray you and your beliefs. This would have been our fifth had you not shown up on time. And it is most fitting that you were able to finish what you started. Again, it was a splendid performance.”
-Michael continues facing Pinhead.

Pinhead: “You are now nearly finished with your hunt. All that is left is your family. As well as the doctor if you wish. In the tradition of your Celtic beliefs, we will prepare a final ceremony where you will be able to finish off your family once and for all. More importantly, you will have the choice to believe in the doctor again and fulfill your destiny. However, if you have no more patience for his guidance, you will have the choice of denouncing your Celtic beliefs and joining us. Think it over. We will be waiting.”

-Pinhead steps back into the darkness of the shorter hallway. The three other Cenobites step back into the hallways they came from and also disappear into the darkness. Michael, once again, finds himself alone – and with an important decision to make.

-Cut to a random hallway. Kara and Tommy both step past two architectural posts. As Tommy steps forward, he looks very determined to the find their way back. Kara turns to him for a moment and is about to speak up. She then hesitates. After a moment, she turns back to him.

Kara Strode: “We should probably know what we have left to face down here. I’ve seen Michael. He’s here. Have you seen him?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, I have.”

Kara Strode: “I ran into Wynn and he was trying to reach out to Michael. I stopped him and tried reaching out to Michael myself. I tried reaching out to his soul.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s good thinking. After reading the book, you probably knew just what to tell him.”

Kara Strode: “I did. But a Druid member stopped me. And then, Michael killed her. I’ve seen Michael kill two Druid members, and I think a third one as well. I don’t know about Wynn.”

Tommy Doyle: “So, that puts the bodycount up to five.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #24  
Old 06-30-2012, 06:20 PM
Helloween - Part 21

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Kara Strode: “Five?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah. I’ve seen Michael kill two Druid members. Including Melinda.”

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh…”

Tommy Doyle: “I know. I tried to save her, but…”

-Tommy sighs.

Tommy Doyle: “…I couldn’t. I wouldn’t wish this place on anyone.”

Kara Strode: “Neither would I.”

Tommy Doyle: “All right. So, in the beginning, there must have been about a dozen Druid members. Not including Wynn and his daughter. That leaves eight Druid members and possibly Wynn. But we’ve been down here for a long time. Michael may have killed more of them by now.”

Kara Strode: “That’s true.”

Tommy Doyle: “Either way, our chances of getting out of here are better than it was before.”

-They continue stepping down the hallway and begin making out the rotunda up ahead. Tommy turns to Kara, then begins walking a little slower. Kara also begins walking slower. They slowly make their way to the end of the hallway and step out into the rotunda. At first, they don’t see anybody. They look around from the far left hallway to the far right one. And suddenly, two people step out of the shorter hallway instead. It is Danny and Stephen.

Danny Strode: “Mom! Tommy!”

Kara Strode: “Danny! Stephen! Thank God!”

Tommy Doyle: “Danny. It’s good to see you’re okay.”

Danny Strode: “You, too.”

-Kara rushes over to hug her son. As she does, Stephen steps forward and begins wandering around the rotunda.

Kara Strode: “Oh, Danny!”

-As Danny hugs his mom back, he takes notice of Tommy’s bruised face.

Danny Strode: “What happened to you? Are you okay?”

Tommy Doyle: “I got into a little fight with one of the lost souls down here. Don’t worry about me, I’ll be fine. What matters is that all of us are okay.”

-Kara lets go of Danny.

Kara Strode: “That’s right. We are finally together again and we’re going to get out of here.”

Danny Strode: “Good.”

-Kara can’t help but hug Danny again.

Kara Strode: “Oh, Danny…”

-Danny rolls his eyes.

Danny Strode: “Mom…”

-Tommy takes notice of Stephen wandering around the rotunda. He gets down to his knees and calls for him.

Tommy Doyle: “Hey, buddy, come over here.”

-Stephen turns to Tommy and steps over to him. Tommy, on Stephen’s level, begins speaking up.

Tommy Doyle: “Listen, you’re safe with us. You were smart to trust Danny and listen to him. We’re going to get you out of here. We’re all going to get out of here and you’ll never see this place again. I promise.”

Stephen Lloyd: “Okay…”

Tommy Doyle: “We haven’t been formally introduced. I’m Tommy. I used to know you as Stephen. Stephen Lloyd. Is that what they call you now?”

-Stephen turns to Tommy for a moment, then speaks up.

Stephen Lloyd: “Yeah. Stephen.”

-Kara and Danny walk over.

Tommy Doyle: “Okay. Well, you know who I am, and you obviously know who Danny is…”

-Tommy turns to Kara, then back to Stephen.

Tommy Doyle: “…Well, this is Kara. Danny’s mom.”

Kara Strode: “Hi, Stephen.”

Stephen Lloyd: “Hi…”

Tommy Doyle: “We all knew you when you were a baby. We took care of you before you were taken into child services. And now, we plan on getting you out of here.”

Stephen Lloyd: “Good. I don’t like being here. It’s scary.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, it is. We’ll be out of here in no time.”

-Tommy gets back up and turns to Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “Danny, have you by chance seen Jeremy?”

Danny Strode: “Yes. I had to stop him from opening the box again. For a while, he tagged along. And then, he went in another direction and threatened to open the box if I followed. There’s something wrong with him. He likes being here more than in the real world.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know. He’s disturbed. I was hoping we could use his help to get out of here. I don’t know if we’ll need him to open the box and close the doorway to be free…of them. But we might be better off without him. As long as he doesn’t open the box again and close the doorway, we’ll be okay. We just have to find the doorway and pray that they don’t come after us in real world…”

-Tommy looks over at the shorter hallway, then turns back to the others.

Tommy Doyle: “…Come on, let’s keep moving.”

Danny Strode: “But we just came from there.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, but they’re shortcuts between the longer hallways. They might be the key to finding our way back.”

-Tommy begins leading Kara, Danny and Stephen into the darkness of the shorter hallway.

Danny Strode: “First, a cult. And now…them. What are they?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think they’re supposed to be demons. Demons from Hell…”

-Moments later, Tommy leads them out of the other end of the hallway and into the next rotunda. Tommy looks around the five other hallways to choose from. He looks from the far right hallway all the way to the far left one. He then looks back over to the far right one.

Tommy Doyle: “Let’s go this way.”

-Tommy begins leading Kara, Danny and Stephen into the hallway. That’s when Kara spots a figure stepping out of the middle hallway.

Kara Strode: “Tommy, look!”

-Cut to the darkness of the middle hallway. The camera begins rolling in a slow motion and the eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. A leg steps out of the darkness. Another leg steps out, revealing the lower torso of a figure. Both legs carry the figure out of the darkness, slowly revealing an upper torso.

-The upper torso of the figure is eventually revealed as both of his legs carry him further away from the darkness. He is tall and is wearing blue overalls, as well as a white Halloween mask. Notably, he is not swinging his arms. They remain by his side as if he only makes use of them if motivated or told to. He, Michael, steps out of the darkness and towards the end of the hallway.

-The camera rolls back in regular motion as Michael makes his way toward the rotunda. As he steps out of the hallway, the eerie “Halloween” theme plays on. That’s when Tommy steps over in front of the others and confronts Michael. As Michael steps toward them, Tommy begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn…”

-Michael immediately stops in his tracks. He then begins stepping back. As he does, the eerie “Halloween” theme tones down and the suspenseful version takes over. Tommy bravely steps forward.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Suddenly, Wynn and Jeremy step out of the far left hallway. Upon seeing Tommy scaring Michael off with the chant, he shrugs.

Dr. Wynn: “Stop what you’re doing this instant!”

-Tommy, however, steps forward after Michael into the middle hallway and continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Thorn believes in you, Michael. It wishes to free you of your torment. Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

Dr. Wynn: “Michael, you don’t have to listen to him. Listen to me. Ignore the nonsense he’s uttering and listen to what I have to say. I believe in you, Michael. I have always believed in you and will always be there for you…”

-Michael steps further back into the middle hallway. Tommy continues stepping towards him.

Tommy Doyle: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo, Michael. Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Wynn steps into the middle hallway and continues reaching out to Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “…Don’t be afraid of his words, Michael. Ignore them. Ignore them and also ignore Wunjo. Wunjo has nothing to do with Thorn. Thorn is much too powerful for Wunjo…”

-Just as Michael is about to step into the darkness, he unexpectedly stops in his tracks. Upon being forced to listen to both Tommy and Wynn, he can’t take it anymore. As if something within him is being stirred up, he looks down and grasps the sides of his Halloween-masked head. Tommy stops in his tracks and continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Wunjo also believes in you, Michael. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

-Wynn steps beside Tommy and also faces Michael. He shrugs and begins speaking up louder.

Dr. Wynn: “…He’s wrong, Michael! Wunjo does not believe in you! It is Thorn that believes in you!...”

Tommy Doyle: “…Continue listening to Thorn! Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer! Allow yourself to become consumed by it!...”

Dr. Wynn: “…Indeed, allow yourself to be consumed by Thorn! Thorn has been leading you all this time! If there’s a time and place to continue believing in Thorn, it is now!...”

Tommy Doyle: “…And continue listening to Wunjo! Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul! And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn!...”

Dr. Wynn: “…No, Michael! Do not let Wunjo contaminate the power of Thorn! It is a poison that will only make Thorn weak! What Thorn represents is power! Rejoice in it!...”

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and...”

-Suddenly, the rotunda and all six hallways turn to complete darkness. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme stops cold and a deep, powerful voice is heard.

Pinhead: “Enough!”

-Tommy and Wynn look around the middle hallway and cannot see a thing. Kara, Danny, Stephen and Jeremy look around the rotunda and also cannot see a thing. As all of them look around the darkness, the dreary of undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme begins playing. That’s when Pinhead appears within the shorter hallway.

Pinhead: “Enough with this foolish nonsense...”

-The Female Cenobite, Chatterer Cenobite and Butterball Cenobite appear within three of the regular hallways. The others tense up.

Pinhead: “…No more running, no more hiding, and no more senseless cat-and-mouse games. I’ve been generous enough to allow all of you to enjoy an extended tour of Hell instead of immediately making examples out of each of you. Well, your time has now run out.”

Dr. Wynn: “Does this mean that…”

Pinhead: “Silence! Clearly, Thorn would rather not listen to you. After seeing how conflicted Thorn became because of your mistakes, neither would I. You will have your chance to make your peace, but not yet. In the tradition of your Celtic beliefs, we have prepared a final ceremony. We will lead you to it now…”

-As Pinhead turns to Michael, the dark “Hellraiser” theme tones down.

Pinhead: “…Michael, are you ready to join us?”

-Within the middle hallway, Michael is still grasping the sides of his Halloween-masked head. After a moment, he lets go of his head. Breathing heavily, he looks up and faces Tommy and Wynn. He then looks over at Pinhead. He looks on at Pinhead for a moment, then turns away.

-Michael steps away from Tommy and Wynn. He steps back toward the darkness of the hallway. He turns around and begins stepping into the darkness. Cut to Michael’s point of view as he steps into the darkness. As he steps further inside it, the screen fades to black.

TO BE CONTINUED ON MONDAY WITH THE FINAL PORTION...
Reply With Quote
  #25  
Old 06-30-2012, 06:53 PM
A little "director" commentary...

The last batch to be posted in the last day was 74 pages. 160 pages down and 35 to go. The first 86 pages feels like 45 minutes of "running time" to me, and the next 74 pages feel like another 45 minutes of "running time." All that's left is the finale...

Spoiler:
...Quite a bodycount, huh? This is an unusually large bodycount and violent rampage for Michael. After Dr. Wynn failed him so miserably, and especially by H6, Michael is pissed. Allowing the Cenobites to take part in the action was fitting. They have always carried those hooks with curved blades, but do they ever use them? I thought it was about time to let them get some exercise for once.

One might question the purpose of Pinhead feeling compelled to reach out to Michael in the first place. Would he really be that interested in Thorn? Admittedly, it might not make 100% sense. He is supposed to be back to normal after his misadventures on Earth in "Hellraiser III." However, what if one dark evil had an opportunity to study and explore another dark evil? Pinhead is all about darkness and emptiness, and so is Michael's evil. For the most part, I think the concept works out in its own twisted way.

Did Melinda Wynn get killed off just as her character was getting interesting? Well, she's a tragic character. Her father's unwillingness to let her guide Thorn seals her fate. Or rather, his failure to be there for her period and his own pigheadedness seals her fate.

By the time Dr. Wynn catches up with Jeremy, his character is nearly complete. He tells Jeremy the truth and spills his guts. One might question his motives. Would he really be pigheaded enough to get his hands on the puzzle box and defy Thorn again, in order to get Thorn back on his and the cult's side? And would he really have a death wish, because of his failure to be there for his family and fear of facing them in his after-life? Just like Pinhead's motives towards Thorn, it might not make 100% sense. But I do think it was a plausible enough idea to explore, in order to make "Helloween" possible.

As for Jeremy, allowing him to open up more in Hell through Leviathan I thought was a nice touch. His transformation is not over yet.

Up to a point, and knowing how it would end, I felt like something missing. There was a lot of "Halloween" and not nearly enough "Hellraiser." It needed one more "Hellraiser" ingredient, and that's where the hallway of tortured souls and Frank Cotton's cameo comes in. I loved the idea of the hallway of tortured souls and wanted to do something with it. Plus, a "Halloween" character needed to be placed in greater danger to account for the fact that they are in Hell, and not Disneyland. They can't keep circling the attractions forever. It needed that extra dark edge, no matter how disturbing or uncomfortable. Was the scene possibly uncomfortable? Well, I still can't believe I was able to write it two years ago, but this is part-Hellraiser and ultimately "Helloween"...


...Now, all that's left is the final ceremony and finale. To be continued Monday.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 07-01-2012 at 07:32 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #26  
Old 07-02-2012, 05:15 PM
Helloween - Part 22

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to the dark screen. As it slowly begins fading in, the understated “Hellraiser” theme begins playing. The screen slowly fades in to reveal a far shot of Kara, Danny, Tommy, Stephen, Jeremy and Wynn being led down a hallway. It is Pinhead and the Female Cenobite who are leading them, and the Chatterer Cenobite and Butterball Cenobite are following them from behind to make sure they don’t run away.

-The camera slowly pans in on them as they are led down the hallway and toward an entrance. Within the entrance is light. Pinhead passes through the entrance, while the Female Cenobite stays back. As Kara and Tommy first step forward and reluctantly pass through the entrance, the Female Cenobite turns to them in a cold manner. She turns to Kara in particular and speaks up.

Female Cenobite: “I look forward to your suffering.”

-Danny, Stephen, Jeremy and Wynn step forward next. As each of them pass through the entrance, the Female Cenobite turns to them in the same cold manner as before. The Chatterer Cenobite and Butterball Cenobite step forward last. As the Chatterer Cenobite, in particular, passes through the entrance, she rolls her eyes. As she always failed to see eye to eye with him? Finally, the Female Cenobite steps forward and passes through the entrance. As she does, the screen fades out.

-The screen fades back in to reveal Michael’s point of view in a random hallway. He breathes heavily and steps past two architectural posts. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Michael making his way through another hallway. He steps past two architectural posts and begins making out light up ahead. As he steps closer, he can see the light coming from an entrance to the left.

-Cut to the other side of the entrance. Cut to a large room. Departing from the entrance is a small flight of steps. Waiting inside are the others. Lit around them are candles. By the back wall is a higher landing with an alter. Standing behind the alter is Pinhead, and alongside him is the Female Cenobite. Facing the alter are the others. On the right side is the Butterball Cenobite watching over Wynn and Jeremy, and on the left side is the Chatterer Cenobite watching over Tommy, Kara, Danny and Stephen.

-Cut to the entrance. Michael, in full view, appears within it and makes his way down the steps. He steps down to the lower landing and begins stepping forward. He steps forward and approaches the alter. He steps within several feet of the alter, between Wynn and the others, and stops in his tracks. And as he stands his ground and faces Pinhead, the understated “Hellraiser” theme tones down.

Pinhead: “At long last. Welcome to the final ceremony, Michael. It is now time to fulfill your destiny…”

-Pinhead turns to Wynn.

Pinhead: “…Doctor, you requested for our guidance in order to reach out to Thorn and point it back in your direction. I cannot say that Thorn has fully cooperated with us, but with my best efforts, I have tried getting through to it. I have done my part. Now, it is time for you to do yours. Step up to the alter. Make Thorn believe in you again.”

Dr. Wynn: “Thank you for the opportunity. And thank you for your contributions.”

-Wynn begins stepping towards the higher landing, then stops. He looks around and realizes that his daughter and the others are still not present.

Dr. Wynn: “Before I begin, I must request that we wait for the others first. They should be here for the final ceremony.”

Pinhead: “What others?”

Dr. Wynn: “My daughter, as well as several of my fellow believers. I am aware that Michael has not fully cooperated with your guidance or mine. I have seen him murder two his own. I am very sure it was to spite me. However, I refuse to believe that Michael has murdered all of his brothers and sisters. As well as my daughter, whose destiny is to lead him, once you are through making an example out of me here in Hell. Where ever they are, I wish to postpone the final ceremony until they have found their way here.”

-Tommy turns to Kara and quietly speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “If only he knew…it’s too late for Melinda…”

Kara Strode: “What about the all the others? Is it possible Michael killed all of them?”

Tommy Doyle: “Maybe…”

Pinhead: “Take it from me, doctor. There are no others to attend the final ceremony. Indeed, Michael has used his bitterness towards you as a means to murder your fellow believers. However, your assessment is correct. Michael is not responsible for murdering all of them.”

Dr. Wynn: “Thank goodness. That’s a relief to hear.”

Pinhead: “In his time spent here, Michael is responsible for murdering nine of your believers. Including your precious daughter…”

Dr. Wynn: “What?”

Pinhead: “…And we are responsible for making examples out of the remainder of them.”

-Wynn looks on in disbelief. He turns away from Pinhead and looks over to Jeremy. Jeremy was right all along and he was in denial. Wynn turns back to Pinhead.

Dr. Wynn: “This…this cannot be true. I wished to accept sole responsibility for all their actions. In order to insure their safety. This is not what I requested. This is not what I asked for.”

Pinhead: “We are servants of Hell. We do not grant wishes. Once you open the box, and once you open the doorway to here, you cannot expect any promises from us. We certainly did not promise to keep to your wishes when you trespassed into Hell. If you truly knew what to expect when you opened the box, you should have expected this.”

-Wynn continues looking on in disbelief. He then remembers what Melinda told him earlier.

Melinda Wynn: “You can’t bargain with evil.”

-Wynn sighs.

Dr. Wynn: “Dear God, what have I done?”

-Wynn continues looking on in disbelief. He then shrugs and turns to Pinhead.

Dr. Wynn: “I wish for something else…”

-The Female Cenobite rolls her eyes and turns to Pinhead.

Female Cenobite: “He is still under the belief that we are genies who grant pointless miracles…”

Dr. Wynn: “…If it’s possible, I wish to trade my life for the lives of my daughter and all my believers who have suffered down here because of me. Let them live again and let me suffer for their actions. In return, I will suffer every bit of displeasure they were unfortunate enough to experience. And for my actions alone, I will accept the extra consequences you wish to inflict upon me.”

Pinhead: “I cannot allow such a thing.”

Dr. Wynn: “Fine, then just the life of my daughter. Please. I don’t care. I will suffer every unthinkable displeasure I deserve for failing Thorn and opening the box. Just spare the life of my daughter. Trade my life for hers. You must. She is destined to lead Thorn.”

Pinhead: “No, she is not.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes, she is. She followed in my footsteps to lead Thorn.”

Pinhead: “Indeed, she did follow in your footsteps. However, the path you paved for her was broken the moment you betrayed her and opened the box. You signed and sealed her fate.”

Dr. Wynn: “I did not do such a thing. I was thinking of her when I deprived her of leading Thorn. I was protecting her.”

Pinhead: “And you were very foolish, as well as naïve, to turn to our guidance instead of trusting hers. I cannot show you the path she would have led had you trusted her instincts. But I can tell you that this is the path she was destined to follow as a result of your unwillingness to believe in her. And there is nothing we can do to change it. Nor would I choose to change it if I were in the position to perform such a miracle. Because she was responsible for her own actions. And you are responsible for yours.”

-Wynn looks on, then turns away in ultimate disbelief.

Pinhead: “My patience is wearing thin, doctor. Do you intend on going forward with the final ceremony or not?”

Dr. Wynn: “How can I? You have allowed Michael to harm my daughter. Even if I did inspire Thorn to believe in us again, I will be down here deservedly suffering for my actions. And there will be no one to lead Thorn and no one to lead the cult.”

-Pinhead half-heartedly speaks up.

Pinhead: “Such a shame, isn’t it?”

-Wynn turns to Pinhead for a moment. Pinhead looks on at Wynn in a cold manner. He continues looking on Pinhead, then speaks up.

Dr. Wynn: “You never intended to help Thorn, did you? You want Thorn for yourself.”

Pinhead: “As matter of act, I do. Thorn is designed to be pure in darkness, and so are we. After you misused Thorn, it will be more useful to us than it ever was in your hands.”

Dr. Wynn: “That doesn’t make any sense. Thorn is a belief that belongs to the Druids. You just can’t take it from us.”

Pinhead: “That is very true. We are in no position to force Thorn to join us. However, Thorn is free to burn bridges and abondon your beliefs if it chooses to. If Thorn desires to join us, it will cease being Thorn and become one of us. It will ultimately serve under Leviathan. And you will go down in history as the imbecile who failed Thorn so miserably, it denounced its own faith. You will become what you have always feared – a failure. A complete and utter failure.”

Dr. Wynn: “That will only be true if Thorn does in fact abondon our beliefs. How do you know it will? As much as Michael must be torn over his destiny and my mistakes, I don’t see him joining your side…”

-Michael, whose been listening to their debate patiently, turns his Halloween-masked head to Wynn. Is he starting to believe in Wynn again?

Dr. Wynn: “…The way I see it, Michael will only see you as another obstacle getting in the way of his destiny.”

-Wynn looks on at Pinhead, then looks over at Michael. Michael continues looking on at Wynn for a moment, then turns back to Pinhead. Wynn also turns back to Pinhead and prevails.

Dr. Wynn: “You know what, I think I will take this opportunity to inspire Thorn.”

Pinhead: “Go right ahead. Your attempt will be futile, but do as you wish.”

Dr. Wynn: “Thank you.”

-Wynn looks back over at Michael, then walks over to the higher landing. He steps up to it and walks over to the alter. As he does, Pinhead and the Female Cenobite step aside. Wynn steps up to the alter. He looks down at Michael and faces him for a moment. He then begins speaking up.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael, there is no denying it. In the past, and right up this point, I failed you. I failed to guide you to your destiny. I lost my way along my journey, and as a result, so did you. You became hopelessly lost, because I allowed distractions to get in your way. I never should have allowed Loomis to look over you. By allowing him to do so, he became obsessed with you and prevented you from fulfilling your destiny a lot sooner than you should have…”

-Wynn turns to Kara, Danny and Stephen.

Dr. Wynn: “…Why, you should have finished off their bloodline years ago…”

-Wynn turns back to Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “…And you should have already rested and started on another bloodline by now. But you were unable to, because I didn’t let you. I was unable to guide you to your destiny, because I didn’t know what I was doing. Time and time again, I tried to get you back on the right track, but Loomis continued to get in the way. But it’s not his fault. It’s mine for allowing him to look over you in the first place…”

-Wynn turns to Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “…If that’s not enough, I also overlooked this fine young man…”

-Wynn turns back to Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “…He became inspired by you at a young age and also became obsessed with you. And if it isn’t fitting enough, he has picked up where Loomis left off…and something just occurred to me…”

-Wynn turns back to Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “…Tommy, if you’re interested, it’s not too late. I have seen you in action. And clearly, you could not be more knowledgeable of our beliefs. Once they are done making an example out of me down here, you can pick up where my daughter was supposed to leave off. I am sure Thorn and the other Runes will approve of you as their next leader. While you still have a chance, you should consider this. It may be your only way out…”

-Wynn turns back to Michael again.

Dr. Wynn: “…Michael, while leading you, I made mistakes every step of the way. However, I never stopped looking out for you. I looked out for you so much, that I failed to be there for my family. In my eyes, you were almost a son to me. Clearly, my own guidance was out of focus from the very beginning, and that could very well be a contributing factor to what has happened. Well, I have no more excuses. I have owned up to my mistakes. All I have left now is to suffer the consequences of my actions. And before I do that, consider my wishes…”

-Wynn turns to Pinhead and the Female Cenobite behind him.

Dr. Wynn: “…They can’t answer them…”

-Wynn turns back to Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “…But you can. Whether you are willing to forgive me or not, I still believe in you. And I hope you still have faith in our Celtic beliefs. If you do, please consider sticking to our beliefs…”

-Wynn turns back to Pinhead and the Female Cenobite.

Dr. Wynn: “…And if they, by chance, prevent you from sticking to your Celtic beliefs, don’t let them…”

-Wynn turns back to Michael again.

Dr. Wynn: “…Fight back if you absolutely have to. Fight back for me, or just fight back for the sake of your beliefs if you are truly that sick of me. But please. Whatever you do, don’t turn against our beliefs as a means to spite me. You have already broken my heart by murdering your own brothers and sisters who believed in you. As well as my own daughter. So, if there’s any bitterness left within you, ignore it and consider what you really want…”

-Wynn turns to Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “…Again, this also goes for you, Tommy. Whatever happens, you and Michael may have the only fighting chance to get out of here…”

-Wynn turns to Kara, Danny and Stephen.

Dr. Wynn: “…Your heart may want to stick by them…”

-Wynn turns back to Tommy again.

Dr. Wynn: “…But their fate was sealed before I ever opened the doorway to this place. If you stick by them, you will suffer the same fate as them. If that’s what your heart wants at this point, so be it. But don’t waste this opportunity to go back and lead Thorn. Before it is too late, consider it. Hopefully, you have been thinking it over during your stay here. Consider what your heart really wants…”

-Wynn turns back to Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “…And in your case, Michael, consider what Thorn really wants…”

-Wynn turns to Pinhead.

Dr. Wynn: “…That is all I have to say.”

Pinhead: “Very well.”

-Pinhead turns to Michael, who is still planted to the ground several feet from the alter. He then turns back to Wynn.

Pinhead: “Your effort was very dramatic, as well as long-winded, but also very meaningless. In a moment, we will see what Thorn really wants. Your turn to speak is over. Step away from the alter now.”

-Wynn begins stepping away from the alter. As he does, Michael unexpectedly steps a foot forward. Wynn stops in his tracks and turns to him.

Dr. Wynn: “Michael…”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #27  
Old 07-02-2012, 05:24 PM
Helloween - Part 23

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Michael looks up at Wynn, then steps another foot forward.

Dr. Wynn: “My word…”

-Wynn looks down at Michael for a moment, then turns to Pinhead.

Dr. Wynn: “I believe Michael has made his choice.”

Pinhead: “For the moment. He still has not heard from me yet. Step away from the alter now.”

-Wynn steps aside, allowing Pinhead to step up to the alter. Pinhead steps up to the alter and begins speaking up.

Pinhead: “Michael, I…”

-Michael immediately steps one foot back.

Pinhead: “…Michael…I can see that you are beginning to clear your head. I am glad. I would prefer that you clear your head before coming to either decision. I certainly would not want you joining us under the false pretenses of your previously conflicted mind. Now that you have an understanding of what he wants, allow me to elaborate on what we can offer you here in Hell.”

-Michael steps another foot back.

Pinhead: “You may be reluctant to hear me out now, but I think you will begin to appreciate what I am offering in a moment. I have seen the darkness inside of you and I admire it. I never expected to come to this conclusion, but the darkness within you may be more powerful than any of us. After seeing you in action, I am more than willing to believe that. And I believe that you will be a valuable asset here.”

-Michael stands his ground and listens.

Pinhead: “For many years, you have been a pawn used as a simple belief. A dark belief meant to remind those of the darkness around them. I am not just going to speak for the doctor’s leadership and his misuse of you. I will also speak on behalf of the all the leaders to come before him. Nearly all of them were more successful than the doctor. Notably, there have been a few who almost failed and one who did fail. Whether all these leaders failed or succeeded does not matter. What matters is that they all have taken you for granted…”

Dr. Wynn: “What?”

Female Cenobite: “Silence…”

Pinhead: “…You are so powerful, yet they make so seldom use of you. To them, you are the darkness that stirs things up in their society. They firmly believe that by controlling you, and by throwing you a bone every so often, they are controlling the quality of their lives. They are fools to believe such a thing. Nobody can control the darkness that surrounds them, and nobody has the right to either. If anything, what they are ultimately doing is keeping you on a leash. Is that what you want? To be on a leash and only released every so often, or every other Samhain?”

-Michael stands his ground and continues listening.

Pinhead: “Think about that for a moment. And think about this. If you were to join us, we would not dare put you on a leash. We would have too much respect to do that. Down here, you would have greater opportunity than ever to indulge in your bloodlust. You will not have to wait for the next holiday for another soul to make an example out of. That is because people with conflicted souls die every day, and we see to it that they suffer for their actions. As matter of fact, conflicted souls find their way here so often, that there is hardly a sense of time in Hell at all. There will always be something to do. You will never be bored. And more importantly, your work will be more appreciated here.”

Dr. Wynn: “That is not true! Michael, they will abuse your powers! They will never let you rest!”

Pinhead: “Silence! You have had your moment to speak! One more word from you, and…”

-Suddenly, Jeremy steps forward and speaks up.

Jeremy Walker: “Silence! That is enough from you! ”

-Pinhead turns to Jeremy very questionably.

Pinhead: “What did you say?”

Jeremy Walker: “This is not what I want.”

-As if humoring Jeremy, Pinhead half-heartedly speaks up.

Pinhead: “Really? And what is it that you do want?”

Jeremy Walker: “Thorn has nothing to do with us. It doesn’t matter that is also pure in darkness. It belongs to another sanctuary. To another belief.”

-Pinhead turns to Jeremy for a moment and finally realizes what is going on. Leviathan is speaking through Jeremy. At first, Leviathan helped clear Jeremy’s mind. And now, it is using him to get through to Pinhead.

Jeremy Walker: “I have been observing your behavior, and I could not be more disappointed. You, more than anyone, should know better than to cross sanctuaries.”

Pinhead: “I am not crossing sanctuaries. I am merely inviting one belief from another sanctuary, so that we can make better use of it.”

Jeremy Walker: “No, you are in fact crossing sanctuaries, and also setting out to destroy another sanctuary. Thorn belongs to the Druid beliefs, not in Hell.”

Pinhead: “I disagree. Thorn could be a valuable asset here.”

Jeremy Walker: “You are out of line. And you are becoming too passionate about your beliefs. It doesn’t matter how much our beliefs differ from the Druid beliefs. We do not cross sanctuaries.”

-Pinhead turns to Jeremy for a moment, then speaks up.

Pinhead: “I disagree.”

-Pinhead looks on at Jeremy. Jeremy looks on at Pinhead. For a moment, both of them face each other intensely. At the same time, Michael continues looking up towards the alter. And then, he steps aside. He steps aside and turns to Jeremy. He then turns his attention back to Pinhead and begins stepping forward.

Pinhead: “Michael, what is it?”

-As Michael steps over to the higher landing, he pulls out his kitchen knife (Shing!).

Pinhead: “Michael, what are you doing?”

-Wynn, seeing that Michael has heard enough from Pinhead, immediately begins stepping back. Michael steps up to the higher landing. He then turns his Halloween-masked head over to Pinhead. He steps around and begins approaching the alter. As he does, the Female Cenobite instinctively steps forward and reaches for two hooks with curved blades to protect Pinhead (Shing! Shing!).

-Michael stops and faces the Female Cenobite. The Female Cenobite faces Michael. Michael then looks past her and over to Pinhead. The Chatterer Cenobite and Butterball Cenobite stop watching over the others, and walk over to the higher landing. They step up to it, reach for their own hooks with curved blades (Shing! Shing! Shing! Shing!) and also face Michael.

-Michael turns away from Pinhead and over to the two other Cenobites. He turns his Halloween-masked head to each of the three Cenobites he will have to get through first before making an example out of Pinhead.

Pinhead: “You think you can challenge us?”

Dr. Wynn: “On the contrary, you think you handle Thorn?”

Jeremy Walker: “You are stirring up Thorn. Back off. Allow Thorn to fulfill its originally intended destiny.”

Pinhead: “I refuse to allow such a thing. Thorn’s potential is being wasted in their hands.”

Jeremy Walker: “It doesn’t matter how you feel about the matter. Their beliefs have nothing to do with us. Back off now.”

Pinhead: “No. I will not.”

-Pinhead continues facing Michael. Michael continues facing the four Cenobites. And then, the Female Cenobite turns to the Butterball Cenobite. She then turns to the Chatterer Cenobite. All three Cenobites turn to each other, then lower their weapons. They begin stepping away from the alter and away from Pinhead.

Pinhead: “What are you doing?”

-He watches as his fellow comrades step down from the higher landing and begin walking away.

Pinhead: “Where are you going?”

-He watches as they step up to the entrance and disappear into the hallway.

Jeremy Walker: “They are abondoning you, now that they recognize that you have lost your way. They no longer wish to participate in your pointless crusade.”

-Pinhead turns away from Jeremy in disbelief.

Jeremy Walker: “Do you still admire Thorn?”

-Pinhead turns to Jeremy, then faces Michael.

Pinhead: “Why, of course. Nothing will make me look at Thorn in any negative light.”

Jeremy Walker: “Then, Thorn is all yours.”

-Jeremy steps back with the others. He then lowers his head.

Kara Strode: “Jeremy, are you all right?”

-Jeremy takes a moment to look up. He is no longer under Leviathan’s control.

Jeremy Walker: “Yeah…”

-Pinhead continues facing Michael. Michael continues facing Pinhead. Pinhead then steps back from the alter. As he does, he reaches for a hook with curved blade hanging from his leather suit.

Pinhead: “If I must earn your approval for you to see things my way, so be it.”

-Michael also steps away from the alter. He steps over and faces Pinhead. Pinhead faces Michael. As they continue facing each other, Wynn steps down from the higher landing. He steps over to the others and turns to Jeremy.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy, I believe you now. You were right all along about my daughter. This place, it has a hold on you.”

-Jeremy turns away from Wynn. Wynn turns to him and shrugs.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy, please! You must tell me! Is my daughter destined to suffer here forever, or will she be free to journey to the Heavens?”

-Jeremy continues looking away.

Kara Strode: “That’s enough! You’re scaring him!…”

-Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “…Let’s go! Let’s get away from here!”

Tommy Doyle: “You’re right. This is our chance. Let’s go!”

-Kara takes hold of Stephen, and Tommy begins leading them over to the entrance.

Dr. Wynn: “No! I must know her fate!”

-He watches as Kara and Tommy lead the children up to the entrance and disappear into the hallway. Wynn shrugs and runs after them.

Dr. Wynn: “Wait! Wait for me!”

-Michael and Pinhead continue facing each other. Michael breathes heavily and stares Pinhead down with his dead-like eyes. As Pinhead faces Michael, he finds himself drawn to the darkness within Michael’s eyes.

-As Pinhead continues facing Michael, the camera slowly pans up to Michael’s Halloween-masked head. It pans up to the right eye hole of his mask and into the darkness it is hiding. It begins panning into the darkness within Michael’s dead-like eyes. And suddenly, the camera pans all the way back – Sca-reeeeech! - as Michael swings his knife at Pinhead (Swish!). Pinhead quickly ducks aside and Michael stabs the tension of the air (Swish!).

-Without a second thought, Michael steps forward and swings the knife at Pinhead again (Swish!). Pinhead steps back and now finds himself in a fight. Michael continues stepping forward and continues swinging the knife at him (Swish! Swish! Swish! Swish! Sah-wish!). Pinhead continues stepping back until he bumps into the wall (Thud!). He quickly ducks aside as Michael slashes the wall with the knife (Sha-shing!). Pinhead turns around and steps down from the higher landing.

Pinhead: “You are very quick. That is one of the things I admire about you…”

-Michael steps down from the higher landing and continues stepping after Pinhead.

Pinhead: “Now, allow me to show you how quick I can be.”

-Pinhead unexpectedly stops in his tracks. As Michael steps toward him, he stabs his hook toward Michael (Swish!). Michael quickly ducks back. Pinhead, however, keeps on the attack. He steps after Michael and continues swinging the hook at him (Swish! Swish! Sah-wish!). Michael steps back from Pinhead and into the higher landing (Thud!).

-Pinhead steps forward to take advantage of the opportunity (Swish!). However, before Pinhead can slice the hook at him, Michael manages to dice his knife across Pinhead’s chest (Sha-shing! Splatter). Pinhead stumbles back and grasps the wound.

Pinhead: “Ahh! Argh!...Argh…Aww…Awww…Congratulations, you have caused me to draw first blood. It is just as well. I happen to enjoy it.”

-Without a second thought, Michael steps forward to swing the knife at Pinhead (Swish!), and Pinhead ducks back (Sah-wish!).

-Cut to a random hallway. Kara, Tommy, Danny and Jeremy run past two architectural posts. Running after them is Wynn.

Dr. Wynn: “You must stop! I must find out from Jeremy about my daughter’s fate!”

Kara Strode: “You already know! She’s dead, because of you!”

Dr. Wynn: “I know that! But I must find out if her soul is destined to suffer down here forever!”

Kara Strode: “You don’t deserve to know! She deserves to suffer in Hell, and so do you!”

Dr. Wynn: “That’s not all! I must also find out if I can save Michael!”

Kara Strode: “Since when do you care about Michael??”

Dr. Wynn: “I always have!”

-Back in the other room, Michael continues stepping forward and swinging his knife at Pinhead (Swish! Swish! Sah-wish!). Pinhead continues stepping back and ducking away from every attack. As Pinhead steps back, he follows each of Michael’s movements as he swings the knife toward him.

-Michael steps after Pinhead and continues swinging the knife at him (Swish! Swish! Sah-wish!). That’s when Pinhead unexpectedly stops in his tracks. Just as Michael is about attack Pinhead with the knife (Swish!), Pinhead reaches up for Michael’s knife-wielding hand with each of his hands (Clench! Clench!). He then releases his right hand and slices the hook across Michael’s chest (Shing! Splatter!).

-Michael takes the attack and stumbles back. Pinhead steps after him and dices the hook at him again (Sha-shing! Splatter!). Michael continues stumbling back, and Pinhead continues slicing and dicing the hook at Michael (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “You are establishing your predictable nature very quickly.”

-Pinhead continues slicing and dicing the hook at Michael (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Splatter!), and Michael continues stumbling back. That’s when Michael stumbles back into the steps leading up to the entrance. He falls back and Pinhead steps forward to take advantage of the opportunity. Pinhead then unexpectedly stops and steps backs. As if allowing Michael to get back up, he lowers his hook and begins speaking up.

Pinhead: “I believe that you have proven to be no match for me. When faced against a weaker opponent, you no doubt are the dominant force. However, when faced against me, I think you will find me to be more resourceful than you initially believed.”

-Michael gets up from the steps and faces Pinhead.

Pinhead: “It is nothing to be ashamed of. You are still very powerful by yourself. However, your own resourcefulness is worth bringing into question.”

-Michael continues facing Pinhead. Pinhead faces Michael. Michael continues facing Pinhead, then suddenly swings his knife forward (Swish!). Pinhead quickly ducks away. After a second, he then looks back up to see Michael’s right hand still holding the knife in the air. He also sees Michael’s left hand balling into a fist (Clench!) and swinging forward (Swish!). Michael punches Pinhead in the gut (Pow!) and Pinhead stumbles back.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #28  
Old 07-02-2012, 05:33 PM
Helloween - Part 24

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Pinhead: “Uhh!”

-Michael steps forward and then slices his knife across Pinhead’s chest (Shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Ahh! Argh!”

-Pinhead continues stepping back and Michael keeps up with him. He continues slicing and dicing away at Pinhead (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Argh! ARGH! Argh!”

-Michael continues stepping after Pinhead and continues the onslaught (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH! Ahhh! Admit it! You are enjoying this! You enjoy inflicting pain!”

-Michael steps forward to slice the knife at Pinhead again (Swish!). As he does, Pinhead reaches up and manages to catch his knife-wielding hand again (Clench! Clench!). However, before Pinhead can release his right hand and attack Michael with his hook, Michael kicks Pinhead (Kick!). Pinhead falls back into the alter on the higher landing (Thud!). Not only that, Pinhead’s hook falls to the ground (Sha-shing!).

-As Pinhead reaches for the edge of the higher landing to pick himself back up, Michael steps forward to pick up the hook with his left hand. He takes hold of it (Shing!) and looks down at it. He then stands his ground and faces Pinhead. Pinhead stands back up and faces Michael. He takes notice of the hook in Michael’s left hand.

Pinhead: “Right about now, we are even. You have proven to me that you can also be resourceful. How resourceful, however, is questionable.”

-Hanging from Pinhead’s leather suit are more hooks with curved blades. He reaches for two of them (Shing! Shing!) and faces Michael. Michael continues facing Pinhead. Pinhead then swings the right hook forward (Swish!). Michael quickly ducks away (Swish!). Pinhead steps forward and swings the left hook forward (Swish!). Michael ducks away again (Swish!).

-Pinhead stops and faces Michael. Michael faces Pinhead. Pinhead then swings the right hook forward (Swish!). Michael quickly ducks back. After a second, he looks back up to see Pinhead still holding the hook in the air. The next thing he sees is Pinhead swinging his left hook instead (Swish!). Michael quickly ducks away (Sah-wish!).

-Cut to a random rotunda. Tommy, Kara, Danny and Jeremy run out of the shorter hallway and stop. Tommy looks over from the far left hallway, then over to the far right one. He then turns to the others.

Tommy Doyle: “This way. Come on.”

-Tommy, Kara, Danny and Jeremy begin running down the hallway. Within a few seconds, Wynn runs out of the shorter hallway. Nearly out of breath, he watches the others running down the hallway and struggles to speak up.

Dr. Wynn: “You must stop!...Just for a moment!...I have to find out from Jeremy how I can save Michael!”

Kara Strode: “That’s bullshit! You don’t care about Michael! You only care about Thorn!”

Jeremy Walker: “Actually, he’s right.”

Kara Strode: “Jeremy, don’t believe his lies.”

-Jeremy starts slowing down.

Jeremy Walker: “He’s not lying…”

-Jeremy stops in his tracks.

Jeremy Walker: “…He’s telling the truth.”

-The others stop running and walk back over to Jeremy. Kara and Tommy turn to Jeremy, then over to Wynn. Wynn, relieved to see that they have stopped, starts walking over to them. Tommy turns back to Jeremy and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “You’re still under their control, aren’t you?”

Jeremy Walker: “Leviathan is trying to help you. You don’t belong here. Your souls aren’t conflicted with enough pain.”

Tommy Doyle: “Tell me, does Wynn truly want to save Michael?”

Jeremy Walker: “Yes, he does.”

Tommy Doyle: “Does he know how to save him?”

Jeremy Walker: “No. But you do.”

-Kara puts Stephen down, then turns to Tommy in disbelief.

Kara Strode: “You’re not seriously believing him, are you? He is under Wynn’s manipulation. He has to be.”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think he is.”

-Wynn steps over to them and speaks up.

Dr. Wynn: “Thank you for stopping and hearing me out.”

Tommy Doyle: “We didn’t stop for you. We stopped for him. Tell me, do you really want to save Michael? And I mean Michael’s soul, and not Thorn?”

Dr. Wynn: “The answer is yes. I want to save both. I realize now that I have made a grave mistake by opening the doorway to this place. It no longer matters what my original intentions were. What matters is that we save Michael and prevent him from suffering down here forever.”

Kara Strode: “What do you mean your original intentions no longer matter? You wanted to kill off what was left of my family! You wanted Michael to kill me, my son and Stephen Lloyd! You’re a murderer and a monster!”

Tommy Doyle: “Kara, while all that may be true, he’s willing to help us. We don’t have a lot of time. We have to consider our options here.”

Kara Strode: “What options? Let’s just the get the hell out of here!”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think it’s that simple. Remember what you read in the book last night? You know by now that Michael is not responsible for his actions. Thorn is. You even told me that you tried to reach out to him.”

-Kara reluctantly speaks up.

Kara Strode: “I did…”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, if Michael is truly innocent in all of this, I don’t want him to suffer and be tormented down here forever. And I don’t think you do, either.”

-Kara turns to Tommy for a moment, then sighs.

Kara Strode: “You’re right. I don’t. But how do you know that we can trust Wynn? After everything he’s done to harm my family?”

-Tommy turns to Wynn, then back over to Kara. He is about to speak up when Wynn cuts in.

Dr. Wynn: “Allow me…”

-Wynn turns to Kara.

Dr. Wynn: “…I will not deny being responsible for guiding Thorn to murder your family. And I will not apologize for it. It was my duty to guide Thorn. It was my responsibility…”

-Kara turns away from Wynn in disbelief.

Dr. Wynn: “…However, I will apologize for putting you and your family through this extra hell. I should never have allowed Jeremy to open the doorway to this place. It was, on my part, another step in the wrong direction. I truly am sorry for leading you down here. At this point, I know that there is no turning back. All I wish now is to free Michael of anymore misery.”

-Kara turns back to Wynn for a moment, then looks away. After everything she has seen, she doesn’t know what to believe anymore. Wynn turns to Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “Please, allow me to speak to Jeremy. I must find out if my daughter is destined to suffer here forever.”

-Being a witness to Melinda’s fate, Tommy half-heartedly speaks up. He also doesn’t know what to believe anymore.

Tommy Doyle: “Go ahead.”

-Wynn gets down to do his knees and to Jeremy’s level.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy, please tell me. Is my daughter destined to suffer in Hell forever?”

Jeremy Walker: “No. She doesn’t belong in Hell. Her soul isn’t conflicted with enough pain. She will be released from Hell soon.”

Dr. Wynn: “That is a relief to hear. Thank you for telling me. Now, what about Michael? He isn’t being tormented right now, is he?”

Jeremy Walker: “No, he isn’t. He, or Thorn, is fighting for his Celtic beliefs.”

Dr. Wynn: “What can I do to help him? What can I do to release Michael’s soul from anymore misery? And what can I do to release Thorn from its own misery as well? So, that it can finally rest?”

Jeremy Walker: “You can trust Tommy. He knows how to free Michael of Thorn.”

Dr. Wynn: “That’s right…”

-Wynn looks up at Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “…I stopped you from doing that earlier. You scared him off with that chant…”

-Wynn turns back to Jeremy.

Dr. Wynn: “…One more thing. If we were to free of Michael of Thorn, will his soul be conflicted with enough pain to stay and suffer here?”

Jeremy Walker: “No. You have guided Thorn to prevent his soul from fighting back. His soul is innocent in spirit and frightened by the darkness. If Michael is freed of Thorn and allowed to escape from Hell, he will be okay. However, if he is freed of Thorn and is killed here, his soul will be released. He will not belong here.”

Dr. Wynn: “That is a relief to know. Thank you for telling me…”

-Wynn gets back up and turns to the Tommy.

Dr. Wynn: “…We must go back and save Michael. Are you willing to help me?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes…”

-Tommy turns to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “…I know you that you would rather not go back, but I think we have to do this. For Michael.”

Kara Strode: “No, you are right…”

-Kara turns to Wynn, then back to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “…And as much as I hate his guts, I believe him. I believe that he genuinely cares about Michael and wants to help him.”

Tommy Doyle: “Then, let’s not waste anymore time. Let’s go back now and finish this.”

Dr. Wynn: “Absolutely. We must go back now.”

-Kara takes hold of Stephen. She then joins Tommy and others as they start running back over to the rotunda.

-Back in the other room, Pinhead continues stepping after Michael. Pinhead steps after Michael and swings the left hook forward (Swish!). Michael ducks away (Swish!) and Pinhead swings the right hook forward (Swish!). Michael ducks away (Swish!) and Pinhead begins swinging the left hook again (Swish!). This time, Michael is ready for Pinhead. He ducks aside, beats him to the chase and the stabs his knife into Pinhead’s chest (Shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Ahh! Argh!”

-Michael then dices the hook at Pinhead (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Argh! Ahhh!

-Pinhead stumbles back and Michael keeps up with him. He slices and dices both weapons at Pinhead (Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Argh! ARGH!”

-Pinhead continues stumbling back and Michael continues attacking him with both weapons (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Argh! ARGH! Argh! ARGH! Ahhh!”

-As Michael steps forward to slice his knife at Pinhead again (Swish!), Pinhead manages to duck out of the way (Sah-wish!). Pinhead then lunges forward and stabs one of his hooks into Michael’s chest (Shing! Splatter!). Michael stumbles back and looks down at the wound. Pinhead steps after him and pulls the hook back out of him (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

-As Michael stumbles further back, his left hand lets go of the hook (Sha-shing!). Upon seeing Michael becoming weaker, Pinhead keeps up with him and slices the left hook at Michael’s chest (Shing! Splatter!). Michael stumbles back and Pinhead swings the right hook at Michael’s chest (Sha-shing! Splatter!). Michael continues stumbling back and taking every attack from Pinhaed (Shing! Sha-shing! Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!).

-Michael stumbles back into the side wall (Thud!) and Pinhead slices and dices each hook at him (Shing! Sha-shing! Splatter!). And then, with his left hand, Pinhead stabs one of the hooks into Michael’s chest (Shing! Splatter!). And with his right hand, Pinhead stabs the other hook into Michael’s chest (Sha-shing! Splatter!). Pinhead keeps both hooks in place for an unbearable moment.

Pinhead: “That must hurt. Does it not? Right now, I envy the pain you are experiencing. However, if I have to inflict pain for you to understand my position, then I will inflict as much pain as possible.”

-As blood oozes from both wounds, Michael begins raising his right hand. For a moment, he struggles to raise the knife in it and fight back. However, his hand loses its grip on the knife and lets it go (Sha-shing!).

Pinhead: “You are losing the battle, my friend, and proving that I am the dominant force. Now, you have to consider the inevitable. You have to consider joining our side. You have to consider serving under Leviathan. If not, I will continue tormenting you until you give in. And I must admit, I do not enjoy tormenting you like this. You do not deserve to be tormented. Of all things, you deserve to torment others for their actions. You have such an opportunity to do that here.”

-Pinhead keeps the hooks in place for a long, unbearable moment. As Michael takes the on-going attack, he forces himself to look up at Pinhead. He forces himself to turn his Halloween-masked head towards Pinhead and stare him down with his dead-like eyes. Pinhead faces Michael and finds himself drawn to the darkness they are hiding. But then, he immediately turns away.
Pinhead: “I would enjoy nothing more than to look deeper into the darkness of your empty soul, but this is not the time. I know this is a trick and I know better than to fall for it again.”

-Michael continues staring Pinhead down. He then reaches forward and grasps each of Pinhead’s hands (Clench! Clench!).

Pinhead: “What are you doing?”

-Michael pulls Pinhead’s hands off of the hooks stabbed in his chest. He continues grasping them and begins crushing them (Clench! Clench! Crinch! Crinch!).

Pinhead: “Argh! ARGH! Let me go at once!”

-Michael continues crushing Pinhead’s hands (Clench! Clench! Crinch! Crinch!).

Pinhead: “Argh! ARGH! As much as I enjoy pain and suffering, I am not enjoying this!”

-Michael finally lets go Pinhead’s hands, and Pinhead steps back.

Pinhead: “Argh! Argh!...Argh…Ahh…”

-Michael then takes hold of the two hooks stabbed into his chest. He pulls each of them out (Shing! Sha-shing! Spla-a-atter!). At first, he looks down at them. He then tosses them aside (Shing! Sha-shing!) and steps after Pinhead. He steps up to him and takes hold of his shoulders (Clench! Clench!).

Pinhead: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael steps around and slams Pinhead into the side wall (Thud!).

Pinhead: “Ooof! Argh!”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #29  
Old 07-02-2012, 05:42 PM
Helloween - Part 25

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Keeping his hold on Pinhead, he slams him into the wall again (Thud!).

Pinhead: “Argh!”

-Michael steps back and then steps forward to slam Pinhead against the wall once more. As he does, Pinhead manages to reach for one more hook hanging from his leather suit (Shing!). As Michael slams Pinhead into the wall again (Thud!), he is also stabbed in the chest (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Pinhead: “Argh!”

-Michael stumbles back, but keeps his hold on Pinhead. With all his might, he throws Pinhead against the wall. Pinhead finds himself forced against the wall (Thud!), then falling to the ground (Thud!).

Pinhead: “Uhhh! Uhhh! Ooof!”

-Pinhead begins picking himself back up. As he does, Michael pulls the hook out of his chest (Shing! Splatter!). He then steps over and picks his up his knife (Shing!). Michael steps back and looks down at both weapons. As Pinhead stands back up, Michael faces him. Pinhead faces Michael. Michael then unexpected lets of the hook (Sha-shing!) and turns around. Pinhead watches as Michael begins walking away. Michael has had it with Pinhead. He would rather stop wasting his time with him and finally fulfill his destiny.

Pinhead: “Where do you think you are going?”

-Michael makes his way over to the steps. As he does, every candle burns out and the room almost turns to complete darkness. Within the darkness, Thorn allows Michael to find his way over to the steps. Pinhead, however, won’t let him get away that easily. He turns his head to the left and a chain comes out of the darkness (Cha-ching!). At the end of the chain is a hook, and it hooks onto Michael’s left hand (Ching! Splatter!). The chain pulls away (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!) and forces Michael into middle of the room.

-With his right hand, Michael reaches over to cut the chain with his knife (Shing! Sha-shing!). Before he can, Pinhead turns his head to the right and another chain comes out of the darkness (Cha-ching!). It hooks onto Michael’s right hand (Clench! Splatter!) and causes him to drop his knife (Sha-shing!). Both chains pull back until Michael’s outstretched arms are spread out and preventing him from fighting back (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!).

Pinhead: “It is possible that you may be more powerful than I am. While you have clearly lost your patience with me, I have not lost my patience with you. I admire you too much to ever lose my patience with you. The darkness within you is so pure, that I simply cannot let you escape from here.”

Jeremy Walker: “On the contrary, you will free Thorn.”

-Jeremy, along with Tommy and Wynn, appears at the entrance and begins making his way down the steps. Kara, Danny and Stephen stay back in the hallway. Jeremy, once again being controlled by Leviathan, steps down to the lower landing and stands his ground. So do Tommy and Wynn.

Jeremy Walker: “Michael belongs to their beliefs. Not ours. As it just so happens, Thorn is more powerful than you are. I thought you would see the error of your ways by allowing Thorn to teach you a lesson. Clearly, it is only causing you to slip further into your vanity.”

Dr. Wynn: “I have seen the error of my ways. I followed my own vanity in order to open the doorway to here. Well, no more. There is no turning back. I failed Thorn, and at this point, all I can do for Thorn is free it from its misery.”

Pinhead: “No! You must not do that!”

Tommy Doyle: “Oh, he will. And so will I…”

-Tommy turns away from Pinhead. He turns his attention to Michael and begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Michael, feel the power of Thorn…”

-At the same time, Kara and Danny read out the chant from the slip of paper Tommy wrote it on.

Tommy, Kara and Danny: “…Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-At the same time, Wynn begins reaching out to Michael.

Dr. Wynn: “Indeed, Michael, feel the power of Thorn. Trust in Thorn and give in to what it wants of you…”

Pinhead: “What are you doing?”

Tommy, Kara and Danny: “…Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment. Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

Dr. Wynn: “...I know that Thorn is tormenting you at the moment, but believe me, it will be over soon. Listen to the torment, Michael. You must listen to the torment if you want to be free of Thorn’s misery…”

Pinhead: “Stop this nonsense at once!”

-Pinhead turns his head to the left, but no chains come out of the darkness to attack them. Pinhead looks around, then turns to Jeremy. Jeremy glares over at him. Leviathan is now taking away Pinhead’s powers.

Pinhead: “No…”

Tommy, Kara and Danny: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo. Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel. Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

Dr. Wynn: “…Now that you have handled enough of Thorn’s torment alone, Michael, allow Wunjo to help you fight the battle. Wunjo will stay by your side and make the process easier. With Wunjo on your side, the pain will begin going away…”

-As Michael remains strung out in the middle of the room, he lowers his Halloween-masked head. Thorn is now getting stirred up within him.

Pinhead: “No! You are making Thorn weak! How dare you do such a thing!”

Tommy, Kara and Danny: “…Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer. Allow yourself to become consumed by it…”

Dr. Wynn: “…As tormenting as Thorn is, continue listening to its dark message. Thorn is one belief that will help free you of your misery…”

Pinhead: “Michael, go ahead and listen to Thorn! But please do not listen to the rest of the nonsense they are uttering! Their words are only hurting you!”

-Pinhead then turns to Jeremy again. Jeremy, or Leviathan, continues glaring over at Pinhead.

Tommy, Kara and Danny: “…And continue listening to Wunjo. Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul. And allow it to overcome the empitness of Thorn…”

Dr. Wynn: “…Once again, allow Wunjo to help you by your side. It is the other belief that will free you of your misery. Thorn should be losing its power over you right now…”

-Pinhead watches helplessly as they are almost done the chant. He turns to Jeremy and prevails.

Pinhead: “I will not let you take this away from me. With what is left of my powers, I will do what I can to save Thorn!”

Tommy, Kara and Danny: “…Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and cancel each of their powers out. Now!”

-At the same time they finish the chant, Pinhead turns his head to the left and right. Both chains pull back (Cha-ching! Cha-ching!). Unexpectedly, the room violently shakes around as if an earthquake hit (Ccccchhhhhkkkkkttttt!...). Tommy, Wynn, Jeremy and Pinhead immediately collapse to the ground. Cut to the outside hallway. It too is hit with the earthquake-like effect (…Ccccchhhhhkkkkkttttt!...). Kara, Danny and Stephen also collapse to the ground. Cut to a random rotunda. It also is hit with an earthquake-like effect (…Ccccchhhhhkkkkkttttt!...). It appears the entire labyrinth has been affected.

-Back in the room, the shaking settles down (…Ccccchhhhhkkkkkttttt…). A cloud of dust begins settling and the rattling of chains are heard (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!). Pinhead is revealed to be laying against the side wall, while Tommy, Wynn and Jeremy are revealed to be laying on the ground by the steps. They begin getting up. As they do, Kara calls from the hallway.

Kara Strode: “Tommy? Tommy! Are you okay?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m all right. We’re okay.”

-Tommy stands back up, then turns to help Jeremy.

Tommy Doyle: “Here…”

-Wynn stands back up and looks around the room. The dust in the middle of the room has still not settled. As it continues settling, he begins making out the two chains dangling from the ceiling (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!). He can only begin to imagine what has happened.

-Over by the side wall, Pinhead finally starts picking himself up. Wynn continues watching the dust settle in the middle of the room. So do Tommy and Jeremy, as well as the others in the hallway. Pinhead stands back up and looks around. Like the others, he focuses his attention on the middle of the room. He watches as the remainder of the dust settles, revealing the two chains dangling from the ceiling (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!).

-As the dust finally settles, Michael is not to be seen. What can be seen, however, is blood. It is on the walls, is on the ground and it is also dripping from both chains. Michael is now free of Thorn…or is he? Whatever happened, it appears that Thorn is very tough to pull apart. And clearly, if Pinhead had released both chains while Thorn was intact, Michael would not have been harmed. The chains would not have torn him to pieces.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh my gosh…”

Dr. Wynn: “My God…what have we done?”

-Pinhead, on the other hand, is speechless. Jeremy steps into the middle of the room. He then turns to Tommy and Wynn.

Jeremy Walker: “What you have done is successfully free Michael of Thorn…”

-Jeremy turns to Pinhead.

Jeremy Walker: “…But as you did, he also released the chains and killed him…”

-Jeremy turns back to Tommy and Wynn.

Jeremy Walker: “…Michael is now free of Thorn, because of you…”

-Jeremy turns back to Pinhead.

Jeremy Walker: “…And because of him…”

-Jeremy turns back to Tommy and Wynn again.

Jeremy Walker: “…His soul is also free. Both his soul, as well as Thorn, will soon be released from Hell. And Thorn will be free to finally rest until the next Samhain.”

Tommy Doyle: “I guess that’s the best thing that can come out of this.”

Dr. Wynn: “Thank goodness. It is finally over. I failed Thorn, but I did not fail Michael.”

-Pinhead, having heard enough, immediately begins walking over to them.

Pinhead: “This is not over!”

-Grasping two of the hooks with curved blades, he approaches Tommy and Wynn.

Kara Strode: “Tommy!”

-Suddenly, Jeremy steps in Pinhead’s way.

Jeremy Walker: “Enough!”

-Pinhead stops in his tracks.

Jeremy Walker: “You are not to touch them.”

Pinhead: “You cannot stop me. They interfered with my plans.”

Jeremy Walker: “No. You interfered with our plans, and our order. And you will suffer the consequences of breaking our order.”

-Pinhead gulps at the thought. He already knows how he will most likely suffer the consequences – by being placed in the hallway of tortured souls and deprived of both pleasure and pain. He turns to Wynn, then back to Jeremy.

Pinhead: “What about the doctor? He opened the box. And if any of them contains a soul conflicted with enough pain, it is him. Why, he followed his own death wish to come here.”

Jeremy Walker: “Ordinarily, we would make an example out of him. However, he does not need to be here to face his own personal Hell. His personal Hell will be returning home after failing his daughter and the believers who followed him…”

-Wynn sighs. Even after everything he’s done, Hell will still not have him. He will have to face the Druid cult after all for his most recent mistakes.

Jeremy walker: “…You set out to destroy their sanctuary by allowing Thorn to kill their new leader. As a result, he will have to return home in her place and face his humility. He failed Thorn. He put it on himself. And you failed us. You put it on yourself.”

-Pinhead sighs and steps back.

Pinhead: “Very well…”

-Pinhead turns to Wynn.

Pinhead: “…However, the day will come when your heavy heart has been released of nearly all its burdens and responsibilities. And you will be faced with either your family up above who you failed…or here, where you will be free to hide from them and not be confronted with their word against yours. Deep down, you already know what you want. And I am already looking forward to that day.”

Jeremy Walker: “That’s enough.”

-Pinhead quiets down and steps back. Jeremy turns to Tommy and Wynn, then over to the others in the hallway.

Jeremy Walker: “I’ll lead you back.”

-Pinhead watches as Jeremy begins leading Tommy and Wynn up to the entrance. As he watches the three of them step up into the outside hallway and disappear, he mutters to himself.

Pinhead: “Someday, doctor. Someday…”

-Cut to the living room of the Doyle house. Cut to the opening in the wall. Jeremy steps out of the bright light, followed by Tommy, Kara, Danny, Stephen and Wynn. Jeremy stops and turns to all of them. And then, he begins losing his focus on them and looks away. As he does, the opening in the wall begins closing in, and the light shining through the walls start disappearing. The light disappears and the opening closes in. It is over. They are now free of Hell. And Jeremy appears to back to his normal self. Everyone sighs of relief and disbelief.

Kara Strode: “It’s over…”

Tommy Doyle: “It is…”

-For a moment, everyone looks around in awe. They are really back. That’s when Tommy turns to Wynn.

Tommy Doyle: “Listen to me. It’s over now. We won. And you can’t come after us anymore. It ends here.”

Dr. Wynn: “This is true. However, I must request one thing from you. After what all of you have witnessed, you cannot tell a soul. No one must ever know what has happened this Samhain. More importantly, you must keep our secret and existence hidden from the outside world. If you abide by that, we will have no reason to come after you.”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m willing to do that. No one finds out…”

-Tommy turns to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “…What about you?”

-Kara turns to Tommy, then over to Wynn.

Kara Strode: “Part of me wants nothing but to see you stay in Hell and suffer for murdering my family. And another part of me would prefer that you rot in jail. But if I can’t have it either way, I would rather Danny be safe from now on and be free to live a normal life…”

-Kara sighs and turns to Tommy. She then turns back to Wynn and reluctantly speaks up.

Kara Strode: “…I won’t tell anyone.”

Dr. Wynn: “Very well.”

-Kara turns to Danny.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #30  
Old 07-02-2012, 05:51 PM
Helloween - Final Part

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Kara Strode: “Danny, what about you? I know you’ve been through a lot, but are you willing to let it go and move on with your life? He’s offering us the chance to finally do that. And it means that you can’t tell anyone. However, it doesn’t mean that you can’t talk to us about it. But it does mean that you will finally be free to be yourself.”

Danny Strode: “I want that more than anything…”

-Danny turns to Wynn.

Danny Strode: “…I don’t want to be afraid of you anymore. I don’t want to be afraid of you coming back on the next Halloween. And I don’t want to live in witness protection anymore, either. I want to be Danny Strode again. I want to be free.”

Dr. Wynn: “By all means, you will be.”

-Danny looks on Wynn for a moment, then speaks up.

Danny Strode: “I won’t tell anyone.”

Dr. Wynn: “Very good.”

-Kara and Tommy turn to each other. Kara then turns to Stephen. She doesn’t even have to bother getting the point across to him. He is too young to comprehend what has happened in the last several hours. In time, he will most likely forget all about it. Kara turns back to Wynn.

Kara Strode: “One more thing. Stephen stays with us. He’s family. You can’t take him away from us again.”

Dr. Wynn: “I wouldn’t dream of doing such a thing. Stephen…”

-Wynn turns to Stephen, or actually Oliver Lambert.

Dr. Wynn: “…Or Oliver, you are now free to stay with them if you like…”

-Stephen looks up at Wynn, then holds tight onto Kara.

Dr. Wynn: “…This is good bye.”

-Wynn then turns to Jeremy. He gets down to his knees and to Jeremy’s level.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy, come here.”

-At first, Jeremy begins looking over at Wynn. And then, he turns away. It appears that he is just as closed off as he was before entering Hell.

Dr. Wynn: “Jeremy, it’s me. I’ve been helping you for a long time, and I wish to continue helping you. That is, if you wish to continue receiving my help. It is up to you.”

-Kara turns to Jeremy.

Kara Strode: “Jeremy, you don’t have to listen to him…”

Tommy Doyle: “No, let him be. He might be in better hands with Wynn.”

Kara Strode: “Are you kidding?”
Tommy Doyle: “I’m not completely sure, but he might be a handful. As much as Wynn is a monster in your eyes, he is a doctor. And there’s a reason Jeremy was under his care to begin with. He’s disturbed. He killed a man.”

-Wynn stands back up and turns to Kara.

Dr. Wynn: “He is correct. I have been just as committed to helping troubled minds like Jeremy’s as I have been to guiding Michael. This is none of your business. It is mine.”

Kara Strode: “All right…but let’s let him decide. You brought him into Hell. He’s seen things that he’ll never forget. Let’s let him decide who he wants to stay with. You or us.”

Tommy Doyle: “Kara, we’re better off staying out of this…”

Kara Strode: “I don’t care, Tommy. If he’s going to walk away from this scot-free, I am going to at least deprive him of the last thing he cares about.”

-Kara glares at Wynn, then looks down at Jeremy. Jeremy continues looking away. Kara steps over to Jeremy. She gets down to her knees and to Jeremy’s level.

Kara Strode: “Hi, Jeremy. I’m Kara. You don’t have to look at me. All you have to do is listen. We don’t know each other very well, but I know you’ve been through a lot. You’ve been through a lot in Hell, and you have apparently been through a lot long before it. I know that you have problems of your own and I sympathize with you. I’m a mother. I have nothing but love to offer. And just like Wynn, I also happen to be a doctor. I’m a psychologist. I am willing to help you and be there for you. I am willing to be patient and understand you. I want to help you, Jeremy. Not because of how I feel about Wynn, but because I genuinely want to. I’ve been able to see it your eyes. A boy looking for help. Are you willing to put your trust in me?”

-For a moment, Jeremy continues looking away. And then, he begins turning his attention to Kara. He slowly turns his head to Kara. He forces himself to look up at her. And then, he looks over at Wynn. He turns back to Kara once more and begins stepping away. He then turns back to Wynn again and walks over to him. Wynn gets down to his knees and to Jeremy’s level.

Dr. Wynn: “You made the right choice, Jeremy. I will continue helping you until you are well. One day, you will be free of your troubles. And also free to live a normal life. I promise.”

-Wynn looks on at Jeremy, then turns to Kara.

Dr. Wynn: “Nothing personal. I was there for him first.”

-Kara turns away from Wynn in disbelief.

Tommy Doyle: “Forget about it, Kara. It’s not worth it. Stephen will already be a handful. Just picture the day when we tell him the truth about his family history. And who his father is.”

-Kara turns back to Tommy for a moment, then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “That’s if we do choose to tell him.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s right. Until then, we have plenty of time to decide what we will tell him.”

Dr. Wynn: “Remember, if you choose to tell him the truth, remind him that he cannot tell a single soul. And if you mention me, be sure to tell him that I admired his father very much.”

-Wynn turns to Jeremy and begins getting back up.

Dr. Wynn: “It is time to go, Jeremy. This way…”

-Wynn begins leading Jeremy away. The others watch as he leads Jeremy over to the dining room entrance. He leads Jeremy around the dining room and into the kitchen. He leads Jeremy up to the back door. He opens the door for Jeremy and leads him outside. As he begins shutting the door behind him, there is a glimpse of sunlight in the camera lens. They were in Hell for hours and it is now the following day. Halloween has officially passed and is over. Back in the living room, Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “It’s really over, isn’t it?”

Tommy Doyle: “It is. We can go home.”

Kara Strode: “Where is home?”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s the funny thing about it. We can make it whatever we want it to be.”

-Cut to outside of the Doyle house. The eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. The camera focuses from outside the porch as the front door opens. There is just a glimpse of sunlight in the camera lens. Kara and Tommy appear within the doorway and begin leading Danny and Stephen outside. As they begin stepping out onto the front porch, the camera begins panning away.

-As Tommy, Kara, Danny and Stephen step down from the porch and onto the front yard, the camera loses focus on them as more sunlight shines on the lens. They are now free of the darkness of Hell and the Druid cult, and are now moving on into a brighter future. The camera loses more focus on them and then pans up into the sunlight. Just as the eerie “Halloween” theme is about to play on, it stops cold and the screen fades to white. And then to black.

-Cut to the dark screen. It fades in to reveal the front of a four-story, scholarly-looking building. A sign in front of it reads: Smith’s Grove Warren County Sanitarium. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal an underground basement lair where a ceremony is taking place. Gathered in a group are Druid members in robes and hoods. Lit around them are candles. And leading the ceremony with less than inspiring words is Wynn.

-It doesn’t matter that Wynn was lucky enough to escape from Hell. In his mind, this is now his own personal Hell. Until Thorn is strong again to come back, he has no choice but to continue leading the cult. To come back from that Halloween without Melinda and the twelve Druid members to join him in his effort could not be more humiliating. He is the first Druid leader to fail this miserably since 1831.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Wynn reaching out to Jeremy. Jeremy is now in his mid-to-late teens and is opening up a lot more to the outside world. The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Wynn in a court of law. He is on the stand offering his diagnosis of Jeremy’s mental health and his continuing progress.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal Wynn saying good bye to Jeremy outside of Smith’s Grove. Jeremy is now in his mid-twenties and is free to move on with his life. As Wynn watches Jeremy’s mother drive him away, he sighs of relief. Of all things, he has not failed Jeremy.

-The screen fades out and then back in to reveal a ceremony taking place at Smith’s Grove. Leading with very inspiring words is Wynn. He then steps aside for the new intended leader in the darkness behind him. The new leader steps up to the alter to continue where Wynn left off and begin guiding Thorn.

-The screen fades out and then back to reveal Wynn in his home. By now, he is a much older man. He is also making use of a cane to make his way over to his bed. He steps over to the bed and sits down. He looks on aimlessly around his bedroom.

-Wynn now has nothing left to live for. And he also has nothing to look forward to in this after-life. He is petrified at the thought of facing his deceased wife and daughter. He is now ready to move on to the next stage of his life under his own conditions.

-Wynn reaches over and pulls open a drawer. He pulls out, none other than, the puzzle box. He first turns the box around and looks at all six sides. He picks a side with a small circle in the center of the side. He begins feeling it out with one of his thumbs, and a creaking can be heard from all around the bedroom. Much like the creaking of a door. At the same time, a very understated version of the “Hellraiser” theme with the quiet undertones of a lullaby is heard from within the box.

-Wynn continues feeling out the circle with his thumb. He then presses onto it and pushes it in. He pushes the circle in and one side of the box begins opening up over the top. It opens up and a piece slides over to the center. As it does, a strong gust of wind comes in from the open doorway. His closet door also bursts open (Slam!) and a strong gust of wind mysteriously comes out from inside of it.

-If that’s not enough, the beastly growls of demons are heard all around the bedroom. Wynn tenses up only a little bit. He has seen this before and he is has been waiting anxiously for it. Eventually, an outside production of steam pipes is heard. The dreary undertones of the dark “Hellraiser” theme begin playing. Light and steam appears from every little inch between the wooden frames in the walls.

-Suddenly, an opening appears in one of the side walls. Breaking the laws of logic and geography, the wall opens up revealing an entrance into another world. An entrance with bright light. The chaotic environment finally lightens up. The creaking stops and the gusts of wind forces itself back outside, shutting the bedroom door and closet door (Slam! Slam!). All that remains is the light shining through the walls. The dark “Hellraiser” theme tones down.

-Wynn reaches over his cane. As he does, he takes notice of the puzzle box closing in his right hand. The one side closes back down and into a square. He keeps the puzzle box in his right hand. And with his left hand, he takes hold of the cane and helps himself up from the bed. He begins stepping toward the opening in the side wall.

-As he steps toward the opening, a figure appears within it. It is Pinhead and he personally steps out into the bedroom to greet Wynn. Wynn stops in his tracks and faces Pinhead.

Pinhead: “Doctor.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes.”

Pinhead: “Are you ready?”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes, I am. I have been waiting for this for a long time.”

Pinhead: “So have I. It is long overdue. Come this way.”

-Wynn makes his way over to the side wall. He steps over to the opening and up to Pinhead. Pinhead begins leading him inside the bright light.

Pinhead: “Down the dark decades of your pain, your suffering will be legendary. Even in Hell…”

-As both of them disappear into the bright light, the opening in the side wall begins closing in. At the same time, the light shining through the walls starts disappearing. As the light disappears, and as the opening closes in, the screen fades to black.

-Cut to the dark screen. The understated version of the “Hellraiser” theme begins playing. Before the end credits start scrolling up, a message appears: In memory of Donald Pleasance, Debra Hill and Moustapha Akkad. The message begins scrolling up, followed by the end credits. The understated “Hellraiser” theme eventually plays out and the eerie “Halloween” theme takes over for the remainder of the end credits.

-The eerie “Halloween” theme eventually plays out and so does the end credits. The last end credit scrolls up and disappears off the screen.

-For a moment, the dark screen remains. And then, it unexpectedly fades in to reveal one extra scene featuring Melinda Wynn and her mother in their after-lives. The setting is their family home, where they are revealed to be playing a board game in the living room. Melinda is represented by the innocent child she used to be, before choosing to follow in her father’s footsteps. Her mother is respresented by the young woman she used to be, long before being diagnosed with cancer.

Melinda Wynn: “Where’s Daddy?”

Mrs. Wynn: “He’s not coming.”

Melinda Wynn: “Why?”

Mrs. Wynn: “Because he never followed his heart. He never forgave himself. If he did…I would have forgiven him.”

Melinda Wynn: “Me, too.”

-The screen fades to black. The end.

THE END...




























































THE END...(beware of spoilers above)



































































THE END...(beware of spoilers above)





































































THE END...(beware of spoilers above)
















































































THE END...(beware of spoilers above)
Reply With Quote
  #31  
Old 07-02-2012, 06:11 PM
final "director" commentary

That was it...

Spoiler:
...You get a final ceremony and nice little fight between Michael and Pinhead. The fight only takes up a small part of the story, but is it not satisfying enough? "Freddy vs. Jason" warranted a big fight in the last half hour; "Helloween" doesn't. For it be successful, it had to be less about a overhyped fight and more about the "Halloween" characters trapped in Hell and facing their deepest fears. It had to be taken more seriously than FvJ was.

For those that read "Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers," this is another fan-fiction sequel that exists in another dimension and offers different closure to the "Halloween" series and saga of Michael Myers. However, the Druid cult will continue with their beliefs, including Thorn. There is nothing Kara, Danny, Stephen and Tommy can do to stop them. And the world of "Hellraiser" will continue as well. Pinhead lost his way again, but soon enough continues his singleminded pursuit for blood, pleasure, pain and all that nasty stuff.

I hope the extra scene after the end credits isn't perceived as a middle finger after everything Dr. Wynn went through. It's meant to suggest that he was so tormented by his mistakes, that he never considered the possibility that forgiveness was still an option. Despite the stern words from his late wife. He was so certain of his own fate, it never occurs to him that it might not be too late to forgive himself, decide his own destiny, and face his family in his after-life after all. Some of you might look at him as another tragic character by this point; others may still find him to be despicable. Maybe he's both...


...That is the end. "Helloween," just like "Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers," is one more idea that is not impossible. Not everything is impossible.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 07-02-2012 at 06:36 PM..
Reply With Quote
Reply

Bookmarks

Thread Tools
Display Modes

Posting Rules
You may not post new threads
You may not post replies
You may not post attachments
You may not edit your posts

BB code is On
Smilies are On
[IMG] code is On
HTML code is Off

Forum Jump